Lacrosse head pocket and related method of manufacture

ABSTRACT

A lacrosse head pocket and a related method of manufacture are provided to facilitate consistent, repeatable and/or custom manufacture of lacrosse equipment. The pocket can be constructed from multiple different sections joined with one another, or can be knitted, weaved or otherwise assembled on an automated assembly machine from strands, and/or can be formed as a unitary textile material having regions/sections with different physical and/or mechanical properties. The pocket can be integrally molded within portions of a lacrosse head to eliminate manually constructed connections between the pocket and lacrosse head. The lacrosse head can be integrally molded with a lacrosse handle to provide a one-piece unitary lacrosse stick. The lacrosse pocket body can include one or more fused pocket areas. Related methods of manufacturing also are provided.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates generally to lacrosse equipment, and moreparticularly, to a lacrosse head pocket and a related method ofmanufacture.

Conventional lacrosse sticks include a head joined with a handle. Thehead includes a frame that forms a region within which a lacrosse ballcan be caught, held or shot. A net is joined with the back side of theframe. Typically, the net is constructed from conventional, largediameter laces (e.g., a traditional pocket) or mesh (e.g., a meshpocket), which is further connected to the frame via multiple smallholes defined by the frame. The net forms a pocket within which thelacrosse ball is held while a player is in possession of the ball, andcan be a determinant factor as to the player's ability to catch, retainand shoot the ball.

When the net is in the form of a traditional pocket, it usually includesfour separate leather large dimension thongs joined with the laces. Thelaces are held in place with sidewall strings that are carefully sewnthrough net holes in the sidewall of the lacrosse head. Such traditionalpockets typically require extensive maintenance, and are prone todeteriorated performance when the thongs are subject to moisture.Repeated use of a traditional pocket also can stretch out the thongs,thereby changing the shape and performance of the pocket. Over time, thepocket begins to behave differently. In turn, the pocket has varyingperformance consistency over its useful life. Players thus have to adaptto the changing pocket, or adjust the pocket to a preferred condition.

In addition, when a traditional pocket wears out, the mere thought ofreplacing it can be daunting to many, particularly younger or lessexperienced lacrosse players. This also can be true for mesh pockets,which include a single piece of soft mesh material that is carefullyattached directly to the lacrosse head. The reason many players dreadreplacing or servicing pockets is because most pockets require a complexlacing procedure, which is mastered by only a limited number ofindividuals, to secure the net to a lacrosse head and attain a desiredpocket configuration. Thus, many lacrosse players, particularly youthsand newcomers to the sport, are left at the mercy of having to wait fortheir lacrosse sticks to be restrung by someone else, and even then,after the pocket is strung, it usually takes several weeks or monthsuntil the pocket is properly broken in to achieve a desired profile.

Mesh pockets also have other drawbacks. One in particular is the absenceof shooting strings, a shooting ramp or a defined ball channel withinthe single piece of mesh. Users sometimes intertwine additional piecesof lace in the mesh to form the same, but this can require a speciallevel of skill and time to do it properly.

Some manufacturers have attempted to combine different types of pockets.For example, one type of pocket includes a mesh part near the ball stopof the head, and a plastic sheet near the scoop. The sheet is laced tothe mesh, with the lacing extending across the width of the pocket.Another type of pocket includes two meshes. One mesh, such as a ten holemesh, is near the scoop, and another mesh, such as a seven hole mesh, isin the throat and near the ball stop.

While conventional lacrosse pockets provide some level of ball controland shooting performance, there remains room for improvement.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

A lacrosse head is provided including a lacrosse pocket that is durableand provides desirable playing characteristics. The pocket is easy tomanufacture, replace and/or service. The pocket also can be repeatedlyreplicated to provide consistent performance from one pocket to thenext. A method for making the pocket also is provided.

In one embodiment, the pocket includes first and second pocket sections.The pocket sections can be separately and independently constructed, andeach can include first and second respective edges. The first and secondedges can be joined along a first seam. The first seam can form a firstseam-runner extending generally between the scoop and the base,optionally extending along and/or generally parallel to a longitudinalaxis of the pocket and/or head to which the pocket is attached.Generally, the first seam-runner is adapted to guide a lacrosse ball asit exits the lacrosse pocket.

In another embodiment, the pocket includes a first lateral pocketsection a second lateral pocket section, with a middle pocket sectiondisposed therebetween. The lateral sections are joined with the middlesection along first and second seams, which respectively form first andsecond seam-runners. The seam runners can form a ball channel alongwhich a lacrosse ball can be guided as the ball exits the lacrossepocket.

In still another embodiment, the seams where edges of different sectionsare joined can be formed via a thermal bond. The different sectionsand/or the edges can be constructed from a thermoplastic polymermaterial that, when heated, melts or softens so that portions of theedges and/or sections meltingly intermingle and then bond with oneanother after these items cool.

In yet another embodiment, the seams, where edges of different sectionsare joined, can be formed by stitching of the edges and/or sectionstogether with stitching. The stitching can project upward from frontsurfaces of the sections a preselected distance to form raisedseam-runners useful for further guiding a lacrosse ball as it exits thepocket.

In even another embodiment, the seams, where edges of different sectionsare joined, can be formed by adhering the edges and/or sections togetherwith an adhesive. The adhesive can permeate and/or embed within strandsof the edges and/or sections, thereby holding the sections together atthe seams.

In a further embodiment, a method of manufacturing the lacrosse pocketis provided. The method can include providing first and second pocketsections constructed independently and separately from one another andincluding respective first and second edges; joining the edges along afirst seam extending at least one of a long and generally parallel to alongitudinal axis of the pocket and/or head. The first seam forms afirst seam-runner extending generally between the scoop and the base.The first seam-runner is adapted to guide a lacrosse ball as it exitsthe lacrosse pocket.

In still a further embodiment, the method can include thermally bondingthe edges and/or sections to one another, optionally via the applicationof heat along the seam. The material of the sections can melt and/orsoften so that the sections are secured to one another when cooled.

In yet a further embodiment, the method can include adhering and/orstitching the edges of the different sections together to form the firstseam. The stitching can be raised above the surfaces of the sections toform a raised seam-runner.

In another, further embodiment, the lacrosse pocket can be constructedfrom a textile, fabric and/or mesh material that is engineered forspecific pocket shapes and functionality in different regions of thepocket. The textile material can be substantially unitary and one piece;however, different portions or regions of the unitary textile materialcan be reinforced with additional strands that are knitted, weaved, orotherwise included in the material in a manner that affects thefunctional characteristics and properties of the material in the regionwithin which those strands are located. Optionally, the textile materialcan include multiple different knit and/or weave patterns in differentregions of the pocket to provide the desired properties. For example, inthe middle of the pocket and/or in the throat of the pocket, the textilematerial can be constructed from a unitary, stretchable weaved orknitted textile material. As the pocket transitions to the scoop,generally in the upper half or third of the pocket, the textile materialcan include, in the same unitary textile material, a multiple layerdensity weave that provides added reinforcement and enhanced rigidity inthat region of the pocket. Thus, the pocket can include a stretch and anon-stretch region in the same unitary textile material.

In yet another further embodiment, the pocket can be constructed from atextile material, having engineered characteristics as noted above toprovide specific pocket shapes. In addition, the pocket can include aflexible frame. This flexible frame can be constructed from a polymericmaterial, for example, thermoplastic, polymers, such as thermoplasticpolyurethane (TPU) or similar materials that is bonded to the textilematerial. For example, the TPU can be RF welded directly to the strandsof the textile. The flexible frame can include runners and optionallyshooting elements. A perimeter element or edge element for reinforcingthe edges of the pocket where it attaches to a head also can be includedin the frame. The flexible frame can provide grip and/or stiffness instrategic locations throughout the pocket. For example, the runners ofthe flexible frame can form at least a portion of a ball channelextending from the throat toward the scoop. These runners can bettergrip a lacrosse ball than the textile material over which the runner islocated. In turn, this can impart spin to the ball as it exits the headupon shooting or passing activities.

In still a further embodiment, a method of manufacturing a lacrossepocket includes providing first and second strands twisted in a firstrotational direction to form a first ply, the first ply twisted with athird strand in a second rotational direction opposite the first to forma pocket strand; and mechanically manipulating the pocket strand with anautomated pocket assembly machine during an automated process, to form alacrosse pocket including a predefined, three dimensional, concaveshape.

In still yet a further embodiment, a lacrosse pocket is providedincluding a body strand comprising a first strand and a second strandtwisted in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction to forma first ply, and a third strand twisted with the first ply in anopposite direction to make the finished ply resistant to unravelling.The body strand can form a lacrosse pocket body including a predefined,three dimensional, concave contour. A perimeter strand can form aperimeter flange around at least a portion of the lacrosse pocket body.

In another embodiment, a method of making a lacrosse pocket is providedthat includes mechanically manipulating a plurality of first and secondstrands with an automated pocket assembly machine during an automatedprocess to form a lacrosse pocket body during the automated process. Thelacrosse pocket body includes a predefined, three dimensional, concaveshape, the lacrosse pocket body having a lower pocket portion, an upperpocket portion and a middle pocket portion therebetween. The methodincludes heating the plurality of first strands so that the plurality offirst strands at least partially melt to form a first molten materialthat fuses individual ones of the first plurality of strands with oneanother. The plurality of first strands are cooled so that the firstmolten material solidifies, thereby forming a fused pocket area of thelacrosse pocket body.

In still another embodiment, the plurality of first strands form aperimeter of the lacrosse pocket body and the perimeter is the fusedpocket area of the lacrosse pocket body. The method optionally includespreventing the plurality of second strands from melting during theheating step, wherein the plurality of second strands are located inwardfrom the perimeter.

In yet another embodiment, the method includes forming the fused pocketarea along a perimeter of the lacrosse pocket body. In another example,the method includes forming the fused pocket area so that the fusedpocket area forms a runner extending away from the middle pocket portiontoward the upper pocket portion. In still another example, the methodincludes forming the fused pocket area so that the fused pocket areaforms a shooting string extending across the upper pocket portion.

In another embodiment, the method includes knitting the lacrosse pocketbody with the assembly machine during a knitting process.

In still another embodiment, the plurality of first strands areconstructed from a thermoplastic polymer material. Optionally, theplurality of second strands are constructed from a non-melting materialand the plurality of second strands do not melt during the heating step.In another example, the plurality of first strands are constructed froma first thermoplastic polymer with a first melting temperature, and asecond thermoplastic polymer with a second melting temperature that isless than the first melting temperature. The second thermoplasticpolymer melts to form the first molten material during the heating step.

In another embodiment, the lacrosse pocket body includes an outerperimeter edge and the fused pocket area is formed inward from the outerperimeter edge.

In another embodiment, a method of making a lacrosse pocket includesmechanically manipulating a plurality of strands with an automatedpocket assembly machine during an automated process to form a unitarytextile material including a first region and a second region joinedwith one another as integral parts of the same unitary textile material.The first region has a first set of physical properties, the secondregion has a second set of physical properties different from the firstset of physical properties. The unitary textile material forms an upperpocket portion adapted to connect to a lacrosse head scoop, a lowerpocket portion adapted to connect to a lacrosse head base, and a middlepocket portion located between the upper pocket portion and the lowerpocket portion. The middle pocket portion has a predefined, threedimensional concave contour formed during the mechanically manipulatingstep. The method includes fusing the plurality of strands to one anotherin the first region, and leaving the plurality of strands unfused to oneanother in the second region.

In another embodiment, during the fusing step a portion of individualones of the plurality of strands melts to form a molten material that atleast one of encapsulates an adjacent strand and mixes with a secondmolten material of an adjacent strand.

In yet another embodiment, the strands are twisted with one another toform a yarn. In another embodiment, the first region is in the form of abullseye disposed in the middle pocket portion. According to anotherembodiment, the first region is in the form of a bullseye disposed inthe middle pocket portion. In yet another, the first region is in theform of a runner extending from the middle pocket portion through theupper pocket portion.

In still another embodiment, the method includes fusing the plurality ofstrands to one another by applying heat to the strands, so that a firststrand melts adjacent a second strand, but the second strand does notmelt.

In another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a lacrosse pocketincludes providing first and second strands and mechanicallymanipulating the first and second strands with an automated pocketassembly machine during an automated process, to form a lacrosse pocketincluding a predefined, three dimensional, concave shape. The methodincludes fusing the first strands to the second strands to form a fusedarea in the lacrosse pocket and an unfused area in the lacrosse pocket.

In another embodiment, the method includes forming the fused areainwardly from a perimeter flange of the lacrosse pocket a preselecteddistance.

In still another embodiment, a lacrosse pocket includes a plurality ofstrands forming a lacrosse pocket body including a predefined, threedimensional, concave contour. The lacrosse pocket includes a fused areain which the plurality of strands are fused to one another and anunfused area in which the plurality of strands are not fused to oneanother. The fused area is adjacent the unfused area at an interface,and the interface is at least one of linear and curved.

The lacrosse pocket and methods herein can provide a pocket that isvirtually unaffected by weather changes, temperature changes andmoisture, which enables it to have a substantially consistent profileand configuration throughout such conditions. In turn, this enables theplayer to play with confidence, even under adverse environmentalconditions. The pocket can be pre-assembled, and easily installed on alacrosse head. The sections and seam-runners can be custom configured toprovide desired performance characteristics of the pocket. Where itincludes a preselected set of contours, the pocket herein can requireminimal break-in, maintenance and skill for installation on a lacrossehead. The pocket herein also can be less expensive to manufacture andassemble than conventional lacrosse head pockets.

Further, the pockets herein that are preformed and pre-shaped aresurprisingly consistent from one pocket to the next. This contrasts withmanually strung traditional and mesh pockets, which were generallyinconsistent due to human error or techniques in stringing the pocket.In addition, the pockets herein and their methods of manufacture aresuitable to produce repeatable, consistent and highly customizedpockets. Indeed, a player can select a particular pocket profile andperformance characteristics. A manufacturer can consistently custom formthat pocket over and over for the player. In this manner, a player canpurchase the “same” pocket and/or lacrosse head every time they need anew one. The methods herein thus provide ways to precisely replicatepockets and heads at a commercial level.

These and other objects, advantages, and features of the invention willbe more fully understood and appreciated by reference to the descriptionof the current embodiment and the drawings.

Before the embodiments herein are explained in detail, it is to beunderstood that the invention is not limited to the details of operationor to the details of construction and the arrangement of the componentsset forth in the following description or illustrated in the drawings.The invention may be implemented in various other embodiments and iscapable of being practiced or being carried out in alternative ways notexpressly disclosed herein. Also, it is to be understood that thephraseology and terminology used herein are for the purpose ofdescription and should not be regarded as limiting. The use of“including” and “comprising” and variations thereof is meant toencompass the items listed thereafter and equivalents thereof as well asadditional items and equivalents thereof. Further, enumeration may beused in the description of various embodiments. Unless otherwiseexpressly stated, the use of enumeration should not be construed aslimiting the invention to any specific order or number of components.Nor should the use of enumeration be construed as excluding from thescope of the invention any additional steps or components that might becombined with or into the enumerated steps or components.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a top view of a lacrosse head including a current embodimentof a lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 2 is bottom view of the lacrosse head and pocket;

FIG. 3 is top view of multiple sections that comprise the pocket in atwo dimensional form before assembly;

FIG. 4 is a close up view of the lacrosse pocket along seams joining thesections;

FIG. 5 is a section view of the lacrosse pocket taken along line V-V ofFIG. 4;

FIG. 6 is a section view of the lacrosse pocket illustrating seams beingformed via thermal bonding;

FIG. 7 is section view of a first alternative embodiment of the lacrossepocket illustrating multiple sections joined at seams formed viastitching;

FIG. 7A is a section view of a second alternative embodiment of thelacrosse pocket illustrating multiple sections joined at seams formedwith adhesive;

FIG. 8 is a top view of a lacrosse head including a third alternativeembodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 9 is top view of multiple sections that comprise the thirdalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket in a two dimensional formbefore assembly;

FIG. 10 is a section view of the third alternative embodiment of thelacrosse pocket illustrating seams formed via thermal bonding takenalong lines X-X of FIG. 8;

FIG. 11 is a top view of a lacrosse head including a fourth alterativeembodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 12 is a side view of the lacrosse head of the fourth alternativeembodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 13 is a section view of a frame and textile material taken alonglines 13-13 of FIG. 11;

FIG. 14 is a top view of a lacrosse head including a fifth alternativeembodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 15 is an upper view of a lacrosse head including a sixthalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 16 is a side view of a lacrosse head including the sixthalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 17 is an exploded top view of multiple sections of the sixthalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 18 is a top view of a lacrosse head including a seventh alternativeembodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 19 is a top view of a lacrosse head including an eighth alternativeembodiment of a lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 20 is a section view of the eighth alternative embodiment of thelacrosse pocket taken along lines 20-20 of FIG. 19;

FIG. 21 is a section view of the eighth alternative embodiment of thelacrosse pocket indicating tube runners taking along lines 21-21 of FIG.19;

FIG. 22 is a section view of the eighth alternative embodiment of thelacrosse pocket illustrating a reinforcement element;

FIG. 22A is a side view of the reinforcement element of the lacrossepocket;

FIG. 23 is a side view of the lacrosse head of the eighth alternativeembodiment illustrating lace loops that join the pocket with thelacrosse head;

FIG. 23A is a section view of the lace loops within the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 24 is a top view of a lacrosse head including a ninth alternativeembodiment of a lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 25 is a bottom view of a lacrosse head including the ninthalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 26 is a top view of the lacrosse head including a tenth alternativeembodiment of a lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 27 is a bottom view of the lacrosse head including the tenthalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 28 is a first side view of the lacrosse head including the tenthalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 29 is another side view of the lacrosse head including the tenthalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 30 is a section view of the tenth alternative embodiment of thelacrosse pocket illustrating different thicknesses of an overmoldedmaterial taken along lines 30-30 of FIG. 26;

FIG. 31 is a close up view of the textile material skeleton encapsulatedan overmolded material skin of the tenth alternative embodiment of thelacrosse pocket;

FIG. 32 is a top view of a lacrosse head including an eleventhalternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket including multiple patternsjoined with one another;

FIG. 33 is a side view of a lacrosse head including the eleventhalternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 34 is a bottom perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of theeleventh alternative embodiment including multiple patterns in a threedimensional shape;

FIG. 35 is an upper perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of theeleventh alternative embodiment in its three dimensional shape;

FIG. 36 is a two dimensional layout of the different patterns of thelacrosse pocket of the eleventh alternative embodiment;

FIG. 37 is a two dimensional layout of the lacrosse pocket of theeleventh alternative embodiment including different patterns andattachment elements joined with respective edges of those patterns;

FIG. 38 is a two dimensional layout of the lacrosse pocket of theeleventh alternative embodiment including different patterns with theattachment elements reconfigured to form loops at the edges of therespective patterns;

FIG. 39 is a top view of a lacrosse head including a twelfth alternativeembodiment of a lacrosse pocket;

FIG. 40 is a front perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of thetwelfth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of the twelfthalternative embodiment illustrating a three dimensional bulge orcontour;

FIG. 42 is a section view of the lacrosse pocket of the twelfthalternative embodiment and head taken along lines 42-42 of FIG. 41;

FIG. 42A is a section view of the lacrosse pocket with an elastic edgeelement of the twelfth alternative embodiment and head taken along lines42-42 of FIG. 41;

FIG. 43 is a front view of a lacrosse head including a unitary textilematerial lacrosse pocket of the thirteenth alternative embodiment, thelacrosse pocket being divided into different functional zones;

FIG. 44 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the thirteenthalternative embodiment illustrating different components thereof;

FIG. 45 is a side view of the lacrosse pocket of the thirteenthalternative embodiment mounted on a lacrosse head illustrating theconcavity and three dimensional shape of the pocket;

FIG. 45A is a section view of a portion of a lacrosse head over moldedand encapsulating a portion of the unitary textile material of thelacrosse pocket of the thirteenth alternative embodiment, taken alonglines 45A-45A of FIG. 44;

FIG. 45B is a perspective view of a lacrosse pocket of the thirteenthalternative embodiment being molded to a lacrosse head in a mold;

FIG. 45C is a section view of a lacrosse pocket of the thirteenthalternative embodiment being molded to a lacrosse head in a mold,particularly showing mold pins;

FIG. 45D is a perspective view of an alternative mold including ejectorsof the thirteenth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 45E is a section view of the alternative mold after a lacrosse headis molded over a perimeter flange of the lacrosse pocket of thethirteenth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of thethirteenth alternative embodiment in a free standing form;

FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of thethirteenth alternative embodiment in a free standing form;

FIG. 47A is a section view of a shooting string tubular member takenalong lines 47A-47A in FIG. 47;

FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of athirteenth alternative embodiment placed on a contoured fittingstructure;

FIG. 48B is section view of a tubular vertical element taken along lines48B-48B in FIG. 48;

FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of a lacrosse pocket of thethirteenth alternative embodiment in free standing form;

FIG. 49A is a perspective view of a lacrosse pocket of the thirteenthalternative embodiment illustrating the three dimensional contours ofthe pocket;

FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of the thirteenthalternative embodiment mounted to a lacrosse head and includingsecondary laces inserted in tubular structures;

FIG. 51 is a schematic illustrating a strip of lacrosse pockets of thethirteenth alternative embodiment being manufactured with a knittingmachine or weaving machine in a knitting process or weaving process;

FIG. 52 is a front view of a lacrosse pocket of a fourteenth alternativeembodiment integrally molded into a lacrosse head which is itselfintegrally molded with a lacrosse handle;

FIG. 53 is a perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of the fourteenthalternative embodiment integrally molded into a lacrosse head which isitself integrally molded with a lacrosse handle;

FIG. 54 is a perspective view of a mold used to integrally molded thelacrosse pocket of the fourteenth alternative embodiment into a lacrossehead and also to form a lacrosse handle integral with the lacrosse head;

FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the mold showing a slide being removedfrom a bore of the molded handle;

FIG. 56 is a flow diagram showing an exemplary method of manufacturing aunitary one piece lacrosse stick including a lacrosse pocket thefourteenth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 57 is a perspective view of a lacrosse pocket manufacturedaccording to a fifteenth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 58 is a perspective view of an automated lacrosse pocket assemblymachine used to manufacture the lacrosse pocket of the fifteenthalternative embodiment;

FIG. 59 is a perspective view of a mold used to overmold the lacrossepocket with a lacrosse head of the fifteenth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 60 is a flow diagram showing an exemplary method of manufacturingthe lacrosse pocket of the fifteenth alternative embodiment and joiningit with a lacrosse head;

FIG. 61 is a side perspective view illustrating collection of an imageof a hand strung lacrosse pocket used to generate lacrosse pocket data;

FIG. 62 is a top view illustrating collection of an image of the handstrung lacrosse pocket used to generate the lacrosse pocket data;

FIG. 63 is a perspective view of a lacrosse pocket of a sixteenthalternative embodiment;

FIG. 64 is a side view of a first ply of the lacrosse pocket formed withfirst and second individual strands loosely twisted in acounterclockwise direction;

FIG. 65 is a side view of the first ply of the lacrosse pocket twistedin a clockwise direction with a third strand to form a type of pocketstrand;

FIG. 66 is a side view of the another type of first ply of the lacrossepocket formed with individual strands loosely twisted in a clockwisedirection;

FIG. 67 is a side view of the other type of first ply of the lacrossepocket twisted in a counterclockwise direction with a third strand toform another type of pocket strand;

FIG. 68 is a cross section of yet another aspect of a pocket strand ofthe sixteenth embodiment;

FIG. 69 is a is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment illustrating different components thereof;

FIG. 70 is a schematic illustrating a portion of a strip of lacrossepockets of the seventeenth alternative embodiment being manufacturedwith a knitting machine or weaving machine in a knitting process orweaving process;

FIG. 71 is a side view of a hybrid ply of the lacrosse pocket formedwith first and second individual strands loosely twisted in acounterclockwise direction;

FIG. 72 is a side view of the hybrid ply of the lacrosse pocket twistedin a clockwise direction with a third strand to form a type of pocketstrand;

FIG. 73 is a side view of a pair of first ply loops of the lacrossepocket joined with by a third strand;

FIG. 74 is a side view of a pair of hybrid ply loops of the lacrossepocket joined with by a third strand;

FIG. 75 is a side view of the hybrid ply of the lacrosse pocket twistedin a clockwise direction with a third strand and adjoined with a fourthstrand to form a type of pocket strand;

FIG. 76 is a flow diagram showing an exemplary method of manufacturing alacrosse pocket with a fused pocket area according to the seventeenthalternative embodiment;

FIG. 77 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused bullseye pocket area;

FIG. 78 is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary process of forming afused pocket area according to the seventeenth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment mounted to a lacrosse head and including a fusedperimeter pocket area;

FIG. 80 is a flow diagram illustrating an exemplary process for moldinga lacrosse head and forming a fused perimeter pocket area according tothe seventeenth alternative embodiment;

FIG. 81 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused ball release area;

FIG. 82 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused ball pocket area;

FIG. 83 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a pair of fused runner pocket areas;

FIG. 84 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused scoop pocket area;

FIG. 85 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused extended ball release area;

FIG. 86 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused “T” shaped pocket area

FIG. 87 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused “T” channel pocket area;

FIG. 88 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused “V” shaped pocket area;

FIG. 89 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused “V” channel pocket area;

FIG. 90 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused “U” shaped pocket area; and

FIG. 91 is a front view of the lacrosse pocket of the seventeenthalternative embodiment having a fused “U” channel pocket area.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE CURRENT EMBODIMENTS I. Overview

A current embodiment of a lacrosse head pocket is shown in FIGS. 1-6 andgenerally designated 10. The lacrosse pocket 10 is adapted to be securedto a lacrosse head 20 to form a “strung” lacrosse head. The lacrossehead 20 can be further joined with a handle (not shown) to form acompleted lacrosse stick. As shown in FIG. 1, the lacrosse pocket 10 isin the form of a multi-sectioned pocket including no conventional wovenlacing, webbing or thongs in the inside pocket area 27 bounded by thelacrosse head 20. The pocket 10 includes first and second lateralsections 31 and 32. These lateral sections are generally joined to thesidewall and portions of the scoop and/or base of the lacrosse head asdescribed further below. Between them is a middle pocket section 33. Theedges of the respective first and second lateral sections 31 and 32 arejoined with opposing edges of the middle pocket section 33. At thislocation of joining, first and second seams 41 and 42 are formed. Thesefirst and second seams 41 and 42 generally form first and second seamrunners 41R and 42R, respectively. The seam runners can create a ballchannel and/or otherwise guide the ball generally parallel to alongitudinal axis LA of the lacrosse head 20 and/or lacrosse pocket 10.Generally, as used herein, the longitudinal axis LA can be associatedwith either the head or the pocket.

As shown in FIG. 5, the seams 41, 42 can be formed and the respectivesections joined via a thermal bond. As used herein, the term thermalbond or variants thereof can mean a bond, link or structure that joinstwo elements, for example, sections, through a process that involves asoftening and/or melting of a material, and/or strands thereof,optionally a thermoplastic polymer material, within at least one of thesections. The materials of the sections and/or edges are secured to oneanother when cooled. As further used herein, the term “thermal bonding”or variants thereof can mean a securing technique between two or moresections or edges that involves a softening and/or melting of amaterial, optionally a thermoplastic polymer material, in at least oneof the sections or edges such that the material of those elements aresecured to each other when cooled. Examples of thermal bonding caninclude melting or softening of a first edge and a second edge ofrespective sections so that the materials from which the sections areconstructed meltingly intermingle with one another and are securedtogether when cooled. Thermal bonding can alternatively and/oradditionally include melting or softening of materials, optionallythermoplastic polymeric materials, from which the sections and/or edgesare constructed so that the material of at least one edge or sectionextends into, infiltrates and/or embeds into the structure or componentsof another section and/or edge, for example, by extending around orbonding with strands of one or more of the sections and/or edges tosecure the same together when cooled. Additionally, thermal bonding doesnot generally involve the use of stitching or adhesives but involvesdirectly bonding elements to each other via the application of heat.Generally, a thermal bond can be produced via heating, melting, radiofrequency welding, sonic welding, steaming and/or otherwise heating atleast one of the edges and/or sections to be joined along a respectiveseam. In some cases, however, stitching and/or adhesives optionally canbe used to supplement a thermal bond or the joining of elements viathermal bonding. Needle punching may also be used to join the sectionsor supplement a thermal bond.

II. Construction

The various structural components and construction of the currentembodiment will now be described. Returning to FIGS. 1 and 2, the pocket10 is joined with a lacrosse head, which is shown as a men's lacrossehead. The pocket described herein, however can be readily used andimplemented on a woman's lacrosse head. The lacrosse head 20, and inparticular, the frame of the lacrosse head 20, includes a base 21including a ball stop 23 attached to a throat 22 which can be furtherconnected to a handle (not shown). The frame includes opposing sidewalls24 and 26 extending from the base or ball stop and/or scoop 28 connectedto and joining the sidewalls 24 and 26. The lacrosse head 20 can includea front side 29A and a rear side 29B. The head 20 also can define aninterior pocket area 27, which is bounded generally by the sidewalls 24,26, the ball stop 23 and the scoop 21. In this area, a lacrosse ball(not shown) is usually caught, handled and/or shot from a lacrosse head20.

The pocket 10 can include a network of strands that are structurallyjoined with one another in a woven, nonwoven or other network, with thestrands optionally extending and connecting with one another. As shownin FIGS. 1 and 2, the pocket includes a first lateral pocket section 31and a second lateral pocket section 32. These lateral pocket sectionsextend toward the sidewalls 26 and 24 of the lacrosse head 20, and canbe adapted for attachment directly thereto. For example, these sectionsand other components of the pocket can define one or more string holes12 through which connection lacing 13 can be sewn or threaded. Theconnection lacing 13 is further strung through net holes defined by therespective sidewall, scoop and/or ball stop of the lacrosse head 20. Itis by this connection that the lacrosse pocket can be connected andeasily attached to the lacrosse head. Optionally, the holes 12 can bereinforced with grommets, or polymeric or metal rings, or otherstructures that can prevent the lacing 13 from pulling through, rippingor otherwise tearing the lacrosse pocket 10. Generally, the holes 12defined by the pocket 10 can be laid out in a simple and efficientconfiguration so that even the inexperienced user can readily and easilyattach the lacrosse pocket to the head with the connective lacing 13,thereby installing the pocket on the head.

The pocket 10 as illustrated in the current embodiments of FIGS. 1-4includes a middle pocket section 33 that is joined with respective first31 and second 32 lateral pocket sections. Although shown as includingonly one middle pocket section, the pocket can include any multiple ofdifferent pocket sections. As illustrated, the first lateral pocketsection 31 includes an outer edge 31O and an inner edge 31I. The secondlateral pocket section 32 can include a similar inner edge 32I and outeredge 320, and respective dimensions as the first lateral pocket section31, and therefore will not be described in further detail here. Theouter edge 310 is generally configured and structured so that it can bedisposed immediately adjacent and optionally in contact with thesidewall 26 of the head. In this manner, that outer edge 31O cangenerally follow the contours of the lacrosse head, and in particular,the sidewall and/or portion of the scoop and ball stop. The outer edge310 transitions to a lower edge 31L. This lower edge can be configuredfor placement immediately adjacent the ball stop 21 and/or base 23 ofthe head 20. This lower edge 31 L can define one or more net holes tofacilitate attachment of the pocket in its location via the connectivelacing 13 to the ball stop and/or base. The outer edge 31O and loweredge 31L each can transition to an inner edge 31I. This inner edge 31Ican extend from the scoop toward the ball stop 21 when the pocket isinstalled in the head 20. This inner edge 31I also can be contoured toinclude a curved and/or angled configuration extending from an uppermostextremity 31U of the first lateral pocket section 31 to a lowermostextremity 31B of the first lateral pocket section.

As illustrated in FIG. 3, the edge 31L can generally be curved. Thisinner edge 31I also can be of a predetermined inner edge length 31IL.This inner edge length can have particular relationships and proportionsrelative to other dimensions of the components of the lacrosse pocket.For example, the lacrosse pocket section 31 can be of an overall length31OL, which is the length between the uppermost extremity 31U and thelowermost extremity 31B of the pocket section 31 when laid out flat in atwo dimensional form. Optionally, the overall length 31OL corresponds tothe distance from the scoop to the ball stop taken along thelongitudinal axis of the lacrosse head 20. The inner edge length 31ILcan generally be greater than the overall length 31OL of the lateralpocket section 31. The length of the outer edge 31O can be greater thanor equal to the overall length 31OL of the lateral pocket section.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lateral section 31 can be configured so that theinner edge 31I includes an apex 31A. This apex can be defined along theinner edge, opposite the outer edge 31O. The apex can correspond to the“deepest” portion of the pocket when the pocket is fully constructedand/or installed upon a head. The apex can correspond to the at restlocation of a lacrosse ball when it is disposed in the lacrosse pocketand the head is held generally horizontal or level with the ground. Theprecise location of the apex 31A also can define the shooting andcradling capabilities of the head. The apex 31A can be located atpredetermined locations along the inner edge 31I between the uppermostextremity 31U and lowermost extremity 31B.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the first and second lateral pocket sections31 and 32 can be located on opposite side of the longitudinal axis LA ofthe pocket and/or head. Of course, this orientation can be varied.Indeed, the first and second lateral pocket sections can be directlyconnected to one another and form an integral one-piece sheet orstructure. As mentioned above, the pocket sections also can beconstructed from woven or nonwoven sheets of fabric or other materials.These components optionally can be constructed from thermoplasticpolymer materials. The thermoplastic polymer materials can be the samefor all the different pocket sections, for example, the first and secondlateral pocket sections and the middle pocket section. The sheets ofmaterial for these sections can be die cut, laser cut or otherwiseformed in different shapes and sizes so that when combined they form adesired pocket configuration.

The first and second lateral pocket sections 31 and 32 can be joinedwith or secured to a middle pocket section 33. As illustrated, thismiddle pocket section 33 can be of a generally rectangular configurationand can extend along and/or parallel to the longitudinal axis LA. Themiddle pocket section 33 can include edges 33E1 and 33E2, whichoptionally can be disposed on opposite sides of the longitudinal axis LAof a pocket and/or head. These edges 33E1 and 33E2 can be generallyparallel to one another as illustrated. Optionally, these edges can bedivergent from one another from the base to the scoop. Alternatively,they may be of a curved, angled and/or contoured configuration (ratherthan linear, as shown) depending on the desired performance of thepocket. As illustrated, the middle pocket section can be of a uniformwidth and can extend from the scoop portion 28PS to the base portion28PB of the pocket 10. Optionally however, the width of the middlepocket section can vary and/or undulate, depending on the particularball channel to be formed with that component.

Optionally, the middle pocket section can have, and its edges candefine, an overall length 33OL. This overall length 33OL optionally canbe greater than the overall length 31OL of the first lateral pocketportion 31, when the middle pocket section 33 and lateral pocketsections 31, 32 are laid out in a two-dimensional configuration, forexample, when the materials from which these components are constructedare lying flat on a horizontal surface before being attached and joinedwith one another. Further optionally, the length of the edge 33EL can beidentical to or substantially the same as the inner edge length 31IL ofthe first lateral pocket section 31. Of course, in certainconfigurations, these lengths can vary, and can be in any proportionrelative to one another.

As shown in FIG. 4, the different sections of the pocket can be laid outand configured so that the strands making up the respective sections areoriented in different configurations. For example, the strands in themiddle pocket section 33 can be weaved, and can be oriented generallyparallel to and/or perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA of thepocket. The strands of the middle pocket section can be crisscrossedgenerally forming squares between crossed strands. The lateral sections31 and 32 can include strands that are oriented at a 45° or other anglerelative to the longitudinal axis LA. These strands crisscross oneanother, in an over-under, over-under manner to form generally opendiamond-shaped holes therebetween. In this orientation, the materialmaking up the sections 31 and 32 can stretch more easily in directionsS, so that the lateral sections can better hold the ball for a longerperiod of time before it is launched out of the pocket. Thisstretchability also can provide added flexibility to the lateralsections to better hold the ball during cradling. With the orientationof the strands crisscrossed in the middle pocket section 33, thissection can be less flexible toward and away from the respectivesidewalls and generally more rigid. Optionally, the strands and/ormaterial of the lateral sections can be oriented at a different angleand/or orientation relative to the longitudinal axis LA than the strandsand/or material in the middle pocket section 33 to impart differentfunctional characteristics to the respective sections and the pocketoverall.

The sections of the pocket 10 and respective edges thereof can beconstructed from a material, such as a thermoplastic polymer material orother polymeric or natural materials. The pocket, and optionally thesections and edges, can be constructed from a plurality of strands thatcan be knitted or woven in a network with one another, or alternativelynon-woven. The strands can be in the form of threads, cables, yarn,fibers, filaments, cords and other strand-like elongated structures.Strands, however, optionally can exclude large diameter (greater than2.0 mm and/or greater than 3.0 mm) laces, thongs or nylon webs that aremanually tied or connected to one another or other structures. Thesections and edges can be constructed from polymer meshes, fabrics,whether knitted, woven, or otherwise formed. Generally, thermallybonding the edges and/or sections together provides seams having anincreased stiffness, rigidity, and/or wear resistance as compared toother portions of the sections. The thermal bonding also can be used toreinforce the pocket, provide areas of decreased flexibility, decreasedpermeability and/or increased stiffness as compared to other sections.

As used herein, thermoplastic polymer materials can refer to materialthat melts when heated and returns to a solid state when cooled. As anexample, the thermoplastic polymer material transitions from a solidstate to a softened and/or liquid state when subjected to sufficientheat, and then the thermoplastic polymer material transitions from thesoftened and/or liquid state to a solid state when sufficiently cooled.Accordingly, the thermoplastic polymer material can be melted, molded,cooled, re-melted, re-molded and cooled again in multiple cycles.Thermoplastic polymer materials can also be welded and/or thermal bondedas described above. Such materials can include knitted, woven and/ornonwoven sheets constructed from a variety of strands constructed frommaterials such as nylon, polyurethane, polyester, polyesterpolyurethane, polyether polyurethane, other polymeric materials, andcombinations thereof. Other suitable materials are disclosed in U.S.Published Patent Applications 2012/0246973 and 2012/0318026, both ofwhich are hereby incorporated by reference.

As mentioned above, the lacrosse pocket can be constructed from avariety of materials. Optionally, the pocket and respective sectionsalso can be constructed from multiple layers of materials. As anexample, the layers can be loosely disposed one above the other in someapplications. In other applications, the sections can include laminatestructures, with the different layers secured or attached to oneanother, one on top of the other. One example of a laminate structure isa woven sheet constructed from thermoplastic polymer material strands,disposed over another layer of a TPR, EVA, rubber, or polymeric opencelled structure or mesh. On the opposite side of this layer, a secondwoven sheet of thermoplastic polymer material strands can be disposed,thereby sandwiching the open celled structure or mesh between the outerwoven layer and the inner woven layer. The open celled structure or meshcan be constructed to provide added resilience and/or flexibility to thepocket. Optionally, different numbers of layers of different materialscan be joined to form the laminate structure.

If desired, the different sections of the pocket can be constructed fromdifferent materials and/or layers having different properties. As anexample, the middle section can be constructed from a relatively rigid,more dense, fabric while the first and second lateral portions 31 and 32can be constructed from a relatively flexible, elastic, stretchablefabric or knitted structure. As another example, the sections 31, 32 and33 can all include a first layer constructed from a single fabric. Themiddle section, however, might be reinforced with a second layer that isadhered, molded and/or otherwise joined with that middle section to addrigidity to the middle section. In other embodiments, the middle sectioncan be knitted or woven with a second layer integrally and unitarilyknitted or woven with the first layer to add inelasticity or rigidity tothe middle section. In yet other embodiments, the middle section can beconstructed from a more durable material. As an example, the middlesection can be constructed from aramid, for example, Kevlar®, to addwear resistance to that portion and increase its longevity. If desired,the different components, layers and sections of the lacrosse pocket 20can be mixed and matched, depending on the particular position for whichthe lacrosse pocket is to be used, that is, an attack, midfield ordefensive position.

FIGS. 4-6 illustrate the joining of the respective sections to constructthe pocket 10. There, the inner edges 311 and 321 of the first andsecond lateral sections 31 and 32 are joined directly with the edges33E1 and 33E2 of the middle pocket section 33. Generally, the first andsecond lateral sections can be disposed across the longitudinal axis ofthe pocket LA from one another. The respective opposing edges of themiddle pocket section 33 also can be disposed across the longitudinalaxis LA of the pocket from one another. Both the first and secondlateral sections 31 and 32 can be configured and dimensioned to extendfrom a base portion 28PB to a scoop portion 28PS of the lacrosse pocket.The respective inner edges 311 and 321 of these lateral sections canextend from the scoop portion to the base portion of the pocket. Themiddle pocket section and its respective edges 33E1 and 33E2 can extendthis length as well.

The joining of the respective sections can be accomplished via seams 41and 42. The seams 41 and 42 can be disposed on or adjacent the oppositeedges 33E1 and 33E2 of the middle pocket section 33. The seams can bedisposed on or adjacent the edges 311 and 321 of the respective lateralpocket portions 31 and 32. Generally, the middle pocket section edge33E1 can be joined directly with the inner edge of the lateral pocketsection 31 at the seam 41. The second middle pocket section edge 33E2can be joined directly with the inner edge 32I of the second lateralpocket section 32 at the seam 42. Although shown with two seams, thepocket herein can include fewer or more seams. For example, there can beone seam, two seams, three seams, four seams, five seams, ten seams,twenty seams, etc. connecting different sections and/or edges. Further,although seams 41 and 42 are shown oriented parallel to and/or adjacentthe longitudinal axis LA of the pocket and/or head, those or other seamscan be oriented transverse and/or intersecting to the longitudinal axisLA as described in an alternative embodiment below.

The first and second seams 41 and 42 can generally be formed where theedges of the respective sections meet and are joined. At or near theseams, the lacrosse pocket can be more rigid and/or less flexible due tooptional doubling up of material in this location and/or additionalmaterial in this location. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the seams 41 and42 themselves are configured to form first and second seam runners 41Rand 42R. These seam runners 41R and 42R generally run parallel to and/oradjacent the longitudinal axis LA, optionally on opposite sides of thelongitudinal axis LA. The seam runners can provide an area of rigidityand/or decreased flexibility in the lacrosse pocket so that when a ballexits the pocket, it can generally follow along the runners, optionallycentered between them. Thus, the seam runners can assist in directingthe ball out from the head. Optionally, the seam runners 41R, 42R form adiscontinuity in the flexibility or rigidity of the lacrosse pocket thatcan be used to guide a ball and/or impart spin on the ball. Furtheroptionally, each of the seam runners can extend from a location adjacenta middle pocket 33M of the pocket toward the scoop portion 28PS. One orboth of the seam runners can be substantially parallel to the pocketlongitudinal axis LA. As described below, the seam runners can beconstructed to extend upwardly from a front surface of any of therespective pocket sections. Generally, where there are first and secondseam runners, those runners can extend substantially parallel to thepocket longitudinal axis LA. Of course, in some cases they can divergeor converge relative to the longitudinal axis and/or one another.Further optionally, the seam runners do not intersect, or overlap orotherwise contact one another. Even further optionally, the seam runnersdo not transition toward one another, nor are they joined with oneanother. They can be separate and independent elements that extend alongthe pocket.

The seams and seam runners can be formed via a variety of techniques.For example, in the current embodiment shown in FIG. 5, the seam runners41R and 42R can be formed at the respective edges of the middle pocketsection 33 and the lateral pocket sections 31 and 32 by thermallybonding the edges 33E1, 33I1 and 33E2, 32I to one another. The edges canbe fused together, for example, with heat along the respective seams.Where the material is constructed from thermoplastic polymer material,and thermal bonding occurs, the respective edges and/or sections can bemeltingly intermingled at the seams to join the edges of the lateralsections and the edges of the middle pocket section. Generally, theedges and/or the sections themselves are at least partially meltedand/or softened so that the material thereof joins the respective edgesand/or sections. In some cases, where one edge is constructed from athermoplastic polymer material and another edge is constructed from athermoplastic material with a higher melting point or some othermaterial, the thermoplastic polymer material of the one edge can meltaround the material of the other edge so that unmelted material isembedded within the melted thermoplastic material. Upon cooling, theedges and/or sections are respectively joined with one another at theseam.

To create a thermal bond or otherwise join the respective edges orsections of the material along the seam, the sections and/or seams canbe heated. FIG. 6 illustrates a heating element 70 including protrusions71 and 72 that can be heated to heat the edges 31I, 33E1 and 32I, 33E2so that those components can be thermally bonded to one another. Theheating element 70 can be constructed so that it can engage the pocketin either two-dimensional form as shown in FIG. 6, and/or in athree-dimensional form, with the different sections, for example,lateral 31 and 32 and middle 33 sections disposed in a contoured moldthat approximates the shape of the finished and ready to assemblelacrosse pocket 10.

The heating element 70 and projections 71 and 72 can be heated to atemperature sufficient to melt and/or soften the material from which therespective sections are constructed. In one example, the heating elementcan be heated to at least 200°, 300°, 400°, 500°, 600° or more or lessdepending on the particular material from which the sections areconstructed.

III. Method of Manufacture of the Current Embodiment

To manufacture the lacrosse pocket of the current embodiment, therespective sections can be formed and/or cut using die cutting,stamping, laser cutting or other techniques. As formed, the sections caninclude the above noted edges. The edges of the respective sections canbe overlapped, or placed in abutting or engaging relationship relativeto one another. For example, as shown in FIG. 6, the edge 31I can beoverlapped with the edge 33E1. The edge 32I can be overlapped with theedge 33E2. The heating element 70 applies heat to the edges, optionallyvia heating projections 71 and 72. Where the edges and/or sections areconstructed from a thermoplastic polymer material, the materials of therespective edges and sections melt and/or soften upon the application ofheat to thermally bond to one another, thereby forming first and secondseams 41 and 42. These seams effectively form seam-runners 41R and 42Rwhich are adapted to guide a lacrosse ball as it exits from the lacrossepocket.

Where thermoplastic polymer material soften and/or melts, the materialsof the respective sections and/or edges can meltingly intermingle withone another, thereby structurally and physically bonding at a molecularlevel the respective sections and edges along the seams.

Sometimes, the region of the seams can include unbounded or looseportions of the respective edges of these sections. These edges can betrimmed and any excess material along the seams and/or around theexterior of the pocket can be trimmed as well. The pocket, whenfinished, generally approximates the shape, contour and profile of thepocket when it is to be strung to a head. After construction, thelacrosse pocket can be associated with a lacrosse head and/or packagedfor distribution without an associated lacrosse head.

IV. First Alternative Embodiment

A first alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIG. 7 and generally designated 110. The pocket shown there is similarin structure, function and operation to the embodiment described abovewith several exceptions. For example, at the seams 141 and 142, wherethe seam-runners 141R and 142R are formed, the sections are joined withstitching. For example, first stitching 145 joins the edge 1311 of thelateral pocket portion 131 and edge 133E of the middle pocket portion133. The stitching 145 is sewn through the respective edges to join themwith one another.

Second stitching 146 can be sewn through the edges 133E2 and 132I of therespective pocket sections to join those sections with one another. Thestitching 145 and 146 can be in the form of one or more elongatedstrands of material, separate from the strands or material from whichthe respective sections 131, 132 and 133 are constructed. The stitchingcan be a continuous, elongated strand that is repeatedly looped throughthe respective edges of the sections to join them with one another.Optionally, the stitching can be in any desired pattern.

As illustrated in FIG. 7, the stitching can extend or be generallyraised a distance D above the front surface FS of the respective pocketsections 132 and 133, and optionally 131. This preselected distance Dcan result in raised stitching above the front surfaces FS and providedistinct raised seam runners 141R, 142R along the seams 141, 142. Theseseam runners can more easily engage a ball when it is secured within thepocket and/or is exiting the pocket. Depending on the thickness of thestrands used for the stitching and/or the particular pattern, thisdistance D can range from optionally about 0.1 mm to about 8 mm, furtheroptionally about 0.1 mm to about 2 mm, or other distances as desired.

V. Second Alternative Embodiment

A second alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket as illustrated inFIGS. 7A and generally designated 210. The pocket shown there is similarin structure, function and operation to the embodiments described abovewith several exceptions. For example, in this construction, rather thanusing a thermal bond or stitching, the edges of the different sectionsare joined with an adhesive. As shown, the inner edge 2311 of thelateral section 231 is joined with the edge 233E1 of the middle pocketsection 233 with an adhesive 245, which is illustrated in a finished,dried or cured state. The edges, as illustrated, are in close proximitywith one another. Alternatively, they can be overlapped or abuttedagainst one another depending on the particular application and thedesired adhesive. The adhesive 246 can also join the edges 233E2 and232I of the respective middle pocket section 233 and lateral pocketsection 232.

The adhesives 245 and 246 can be configured so that they are raisedabove the front surface FS of the different pocket sections apreselected distance D2 to better define the seams and/or seam runnersof the pocket. The distance D2 can range from optionally about 0.1 mm toabout 8 mm, further optionally about 0.1 mm to about 2 mm, or otherdistances as desired.

If desired, the adhesives can be formed in predetermined shapes toprovide seam runners of a predefined profile. As illustrated, theprofile is simply a flat, generally rectangular profile extendingupwardly from the front surfaces of the sections. The upper surface ofthe cured adhesive blocks can be modified to be polygonal, triangular,rounded, curved and/or angled to better define a ball channel betweenthe adhesive blocks 245 and 246.

VI. Third Alternative Embodiment

A third alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIGS. 8-10 and generally designated 310. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, the pocket 310 caninclude fewer sections than the embodiments described above. As anexample, the pocket can include only a first lateral section 331 and asecond lateral section 332. These lateral sections are disposed onopposite sides of the longitudinal axis LA. These sections as shown inFIG. 9 can include the respective inner edges 331I and 332I similar tothose described in connection with the embodiments above, these edges,however, rather than being joined with a middle section, can be joineddirectly with one another along the seam 341 as shown in FIG. 10. Wherethey are joined, the seam can be formed via a thermal bond, stitching,adhesive or other means described herein.

The seam 341 can form a seam runner 341R, which can extend upwardlyalong the longitudinal axis of the pocket and/or head. Though shown as astraight line, the seam 341 and/or seam runner can be of a zigzag,sinusoidal or other configuration extending from the ball stop towardthe scoop of the head.

Optionally, in this embodiment, another seam 345 can be formed adjacentthe scoop. This seam can effectively form a shooting string to assist inguiding a lacrosse ball as it exits the lacrosse pocket. This seam canbe created via the joining of adjacent sections or edges of the pocket.This component can generally be referred to as a seam shooting string.The seam shooting string 345 can extend laterally from the firstsidewall toward a second sidewall, optionally spanning the entire widthof the lacrosse pocket. This seam shooting string can be of an angular,parabolic or rounded shape with an apex 345A closer to the scoop than tothe ball stop.

VII. Fourth Alternative Embodiment

A fourth alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIGS. 11-13 and generally designated 410. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, in thisconstruction, the pocket can be constructed from a textile material. Atextile material is an article manufactured from strands, such asthreads cables, yarn, fibers, filaments, cords and other strand likeelongated structures. A textile material manufactured from strandsoptionally can exclude conventional lacrosse mesh. Strands, optionallycan exclude large diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/orgreater than 3.0 mm) laces, thongs or nylon webs that are manually tiedor connected to one another or other structures as noted above. Strandscan be characterized by their fineness, flexibility and a generally highratio of length to thickness. Some conventional strands have anindefinite length and can be combined with other strands to produce ayarn for use in textile materials. Some strands include synthetic and/orpolymeric materials such as nylon, rayon, polyester and/or polyacryliccompounds. Silk is another type of strand, and in particular, afilament. Textile materials can be produced directly from certainstrands by randomly interlocking the same to construct non-woven fabricsand felts. Alternatively, textile materials can be produced throughmachine implemented mechanical manipulation of strands, therebyproducing weaved (woven) and/or knitted material. Optionally, thetextile material and/or strands as used herein can exclude common largediameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/or greater than 3.0 mm)nylon webs, laces, thongs and speed lace loops, as well as leather orpolymeric runners.

The textile material from which the pocket 410 is constructed can beproduced by manipulating strands, using various techniques implementedon a machine, rather than performed manually, by a human. Those varioustechniques include knitting, weaving, intertwining and/or twisting.Knitting includes interlooping strands in a series of connected loops,optionally forming multiple columns of loops. In weaving, multiplestrands are crossed and interweaved over and under one another at rightor other transverse angles to each other at intersections. Strands usedin weaving are usually characterized as warp and weft yarns.Intertwining and twisting can include techniques such as knotting andbraiding, where strands intertwine with one another. Generally, knittingcan encompass intertwining and twisting herein.

As shown in FIG. 11, the pocket 410 is adapted to join a lacrosse head420 in the same locations and to the same structures of a lacrosse headas noted above in the other embodiments. The pocket can be strung withlacing 413 to the respective portions of the lacrosse head 420. Thepocket can be constructed from a unitary textile material 410. Thisunitary textile material 410 optionally can be in the form of a singlematerial element having a unitary construction, which encompasses aconfiguration where all the different regions or portions of the textilematerial are not joined together by seams, stitches, features or otherconnections, but rather via mechanical manipulation of the strandsmaking up the unitary textile material to join the different regions,for example, the first region 411 and the second region 412, so thatthose regions are contiguous with one another. While being constructedfrom a unitary textile material, the different regions have differentphysical and/or mechanical properties, for example, differentelasticity, different stretch, different three dimensional or twodimensional shape(s), different stiffness, different air permeability orflow, different support, different recovery, and/or different rigidity.Further, the strands in the different regions can be constructed fromdifferent material to import the different physical and/or mechanicalproperties. Physical properties, however, generally do not includeaesthetic properties, such as color, hue or shading differences from oneregion to the next. Suitable mechanical manipulations for creating sucha unitary textile material are disclosed in U.S. Pat. 7,347,011 to Dua,which is hereby incorporated by reference.

The unitary textile material generally extends from an upper portion410U to a lower portion 410L of the pocket. Between these upper andlower portions is a middle portion 410M of the pocket. Generally, themiddle portion 410M is within the throat T of the head which occupiesthe lower third, half and/or three-quarters of the head 420 asillustrated in FIG. 11.

As noted above, the pocket can include a first region of the unitarytextile material 410 that is joined with one or more other regions, forexample, a second region 412. The first region 441 can be disposedgenerally within and/or near the middle portion 410M of the pocket.Optionally, this region 411 can also extend downward to the lowerportion 410L of the pocket. The unitary textile material can alsoinclude a second region 412 that is located near the upper portion 410Uof the pocket, generally near the scoop. This second region also canextend downward toward the middle portion 410M, and can form at least aportion of the pocket adjacent the frame shooting elements 441A, 441Band/or 441C, as described below.

As shown in FIG. 13, the first region and the second region transitionsmoothly to one another at an intersecting portion 416. In thetransition, there is no seam, stitches, or other separately constructedfastener connecting the different regions. Instead, the differentregions of the unitary textile material 410 simply transition to oneanother by modifying the knitting and/or weaving pattern or structurefrom one region to the next, without adding a separately constructedattachment element to the unitary textile material. Optionally, thefirst region can be configured to stretch more and the second region canbe configured to stretch less.

Although illustrated as a unitary one piece textile material, the pocketcan be constructed from multiple ones of such unitary textile materials.For example, first and second different unitary textile materials can bejoined with one another along a seam with stitching, such as acontinuous strand that extends back and forth between the differentmaterials, joining their edges or other parts at the seam. Each of thedifferent pieces of joined unitary textiles can include differentregions having different physical and/or mechanical properties, as notedabove. Further, unitary textile materials can be mixed and matched withother materials, for example, sheets of woven or non-woven fabrics,polymeric sheets, composite laminates and other similar constructions.

As mentioned above, the first region and the second region can have adifferent set of properties. The different regions also can have variedgeometric properties, for example, shape, dimension and thickness.Further, the different regions can define different size and shapedholes or openings within and surrounded by knitted and/or woven elementsof the textile material. The different properties can enable thedifferent regions of the unitary textile material to have functionalvariability. As an example of differences between the regions, the firstregion and the second region can include knit and/or weave patterns thatimpart a different modulus elasticity; for example, the first region canhave a first elasticity that is greater than a second elasticity of thesecond region. Optionally, the first region can be configured to stretchmore and the second region can stretch less.

As used herein, a modulus of elasticity is the measure of the ability tostretch in one or more directions. As a non-limiting example, theunitary textile material 410 can include a non-stretch region, astandard stretch region and a stretch region. These different termsprovide a relative measure of elasticity. Therefore, the stretch regioncan provide greater modulus elasticity than a non-stretch region. Ofcourse, the non-stretch region optionally is not without stretch.Instead, the non-stretch region may be more limited in stretch than thestandard or stretch regions of the unitary textile material.

In combination, the different functional regions can provide increasedshootability and/or cradling capabilities of the pocket 410 and head 420in general. For example, the first region 411 can be a stretch region.This can enable a lacrosse ball generally in the middle 410M or lowerportion 410L of the pocket to be cradled better. When a player cradlesthe ball, the increased stretch or elasticity within the first region411 can allow the ball to seat deeper within the pocket and head. Incontrast, the second region 412 can be a non-stretch region, whichgenerally has a lesser level of elasticity than the first region. Thissecond region 412 can be located in the upper portion of the pocket 410Ugenerally toward the scoop. This region can undergo significant forcesas the ball is shot from the head. Therefore, this region, being anon-stretch region, can optionally stretch or deform less or minimallywhen a ball is shot from the head. In turn, this limited stretch canenhance the exit velocity or acceleration of a ball from the pocketand/or reduce the wear within the upper 410U of the pocket.

Although described primarily as including first and second regions, theunitary textile material can include additional regions having differentproperties. For example, the third regions 414 optionally can be locatedin certain areas between the first 411 and second 412 regions. Thesethird regions can, for example, be a standard stretch region having amodulus of elasticity that is between that of the first region and thesecond region. If desired, additional regions can be located elsewherein the pocket.

As another example, the edges 410E generally surrounding the unitarytextile material 410 of the pocket can be constructed to include anotherregion. This region can be a non-stretch region, optionally less elasticthan even the first region noted above. In turn, the edges 410E of thepocket can be effectively reinforced to reduce tear through of thelacing 413 that connects the pocket to the head.

The creation of the different regions can be accomplished in a number ofmanners. In one, different strand manipulation techniques, for example,different knitting and/or weaving patterns can be used to achievevariation in properties. For example, a non-stretch region can be formedfrom using a twill-like weave. A stretch region can be produced using asatin weave. Where decrease air drag of a lacrosse head is desired, ahigh airflow region can be produced by using a leno weave, a hatchweave, a slit weave and/or a plain weave. Other weaves contemplatedherein include a basket weave, a Jacquard weave, a Rib weave and/or anOxford weave. Optionally, multiple different layers can be incorporatedto achieve the different properties, for example, additional layers canprovide reinforcement functionality. Different types of suitable weavescan be better understood with reference to U.S. Patent Application2014/0173934 to Bell, which is incorporated by reference in its entiretyherein.

As shown in FIG. 11, the pocket 410 can be constructed so that itincludes a generally flexible frame 440. The frame 440 can be attachedto the one or more parts of the unitary textile material. Generally,certain portions of the textile material and its strands areencapsulated by the frame, while other portions of the textile materialare not encapsulated by the frame. The flexible frame can be constructedfrom a polymeric material, such as thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU) orsome other thermoplastic polymer material, and/or natural or syntheticrubber which are described above in connection with the embodimentsabove.

The flexible frame 440 can include multiple components. For example, asillustrated in FIG. 11, the frame can include first 441 and second 442runners. The runners can extend generally from the upper portion 410U ofthe pocket downward toward the lower portion 410L. The runners,optionally can be substantially parallel, which means they are eitherparallel and/or in a range of 0°, less than 5°, or less than 10° offsetrelative to the longitudinal axis LA. Generally, the runners also runalongside the longitudinal axis LA on the left and right sides thereof.The runners can extend upwardly through the throat T and terminate atthe upper portion 410U.

If desired, the runners can be configured to have a consistent thicknessfrom the lower portion 410L to the upper portion 410U. If desired, thethickness can vary along that run. For example, the lower portion 410Lin the throat T can have a first thickness that is less than thethickness of runners in the upper portion 410U, generally in the regionof the shooting string elements 441A, 441B and 441C. In turn, this canprovide greater stiffness to the pocket near the upper portion 410U andalso can provide greater flexibility and stretch in the middle portionof the pocket 410M. Optionally, the runners 441 and 442 can be joinedwith both the first region 411 and the second region 412. The runnersalso can cooperate with these different regions to provide a desiredstiffness to the pocket in these regions.

The runners optionally can be attached to an edge element 410E of theflexible frame. The edge element as illustrated in FIGS. 11 and 12 canextend around the entire edge of the pocket or outer perimeter thereof.This edge element optionally can provide additional reinforcement to theedges of the pocket, particularly where the pocket is laced with lacing413 to different components of a lacrosse head. The edge element 410Ecan define one or more apertures 410A through which the lacing 413 isdisposed. These apertures 410A can extend through the textile material410 embedded in the edge element as well. In the regions near theapertures, the frame can be substantially reinforced in the edge element410E to provide desired hold and tear resistance when excessive forcesare exerted on the net.

The frame as shown in FIG. 11 can include one or more shooting elements441A, 441B and 441C. These elements can extend laterally, crossing thelongitudinal axis LA from a left side to a right side of the head. Theycan be strategically located above or partially within the throat T, andgenerally forward of the middle portion 410M of the pocket. The shootingelements can be concave or convex toward the base and/or scoop of thelacrosse head to provide desired shooting characteristics from thepocket. The shooting elements 442A, 441B and 441C can optionallyintersect the first and second runners at intersections 444. There, theflexible frame can generally be of a unitary thickness with the shootingelements 441A and the runners 441 and 442 optionally being of a similaror same thickness. Of course, in certain applications, the shootingelements 441A, 441B, 441C can be of different thicknesses relative tothe runners; for example, they can be thicker or thinner than thethickness of runners. The runners also can be contoured to form a ballchannel. For example, the upper surfaces of the runners can includeangled, chamfered or rounded surfaces that generally assist in guidingthe ball along the longitudinal axis LA when traversing out from thehead.

Although shown as a generally uniform width W, the runners and shootingelements can be constructed of varying widths. Indeed, where certainthicknesses are desired, the runners and/or shooting elements can besubstantially wider than the other.

As illustrated in FIG. 13, the runners, shooting elements or otherportions of the frame can be constructed from a polymeric material. Theframe component illustrated 442 generally can encapsulate at least aportion of the textile material. As illustrated, the shooting element442 substantially encapsulates the portion of the textile material ofthe first region 411 and the portion of the textile material of thesecond region 412, optionally where those regions transition to oneanother at an intersecting portion 416. Optionally, the frame need notbe placed precisely over an intersecting portion of a textile element,and can instead be placed entirely within one of the different regionsof the unitary textile element.

As illustrated in FIG. 13, the frame can include a front surface 442Uand a rear surface 442E. The textile material 410 is embedded within andencapsulated within the frame component 442 between the front 442U andrear 442E surfaces. In some cases of course, the portions of the textilematerial can be reflected through and actually extend through portionsof the upper or lower surface where desired. This can be acceptable onthe outside or exterior of the pocket, but generally can present issuesif the fabric is in a high wear location and projects through the frontsurface 442U of the component 442. Further, the illustrated portions ofthe flexible frame 442 encapsulating the textile material can be any ofthe different frame components. For example, the runners, the edgeelement and/or the shooting elements can be bonded to and encapsulatethe textile material. Generally, the frame provides preselectedstiffness to the textile material where it encapsulates the same. Thatstiffness can optionally vary from region to region of the textilematerial. Where the frame is disposed along an intersecting portion ofthe textile material, that material can be encapsulated by and/orembedded within the polymeric material forming the frame component.

A method for manufacturing the lacrosse pocket of the fourth alternativeembodiment will now be described. Generally, the unitary textilematerial can be constructed from multiple strands. These strands can bemanipulated to form the textile, for example, by weaving or knitting(which can encompass intertwining and/or twisting) the strands. As thetextile material is constructed, the first, second and any otherregions, having different sets of properties as described above, areformed integrally within the unitary textile material. In most cases,the first and second regions are not stitched, adhered, glued orotherwise fastened to one another. Instead the structure of the unitarytextile material joins the different regions at some intersectingportion as described above, so that the different regions are contiguousand uninterrupted.

With the unitary textile material formed, the pocket can be shaped,which means it can undergo the action of cutting, trimming, shearing,etching, burning, melting or otherwise being removed from a larger pieceto form the outline of a lacrosse head pocket. The shape can be selectedto fit particular head configurations and/or provide other functionalperformance characteristics.

The pocket is formed with the upper portion 410U, the lower portion 410Land the middle pocket portion 410M. These different components caninclude different elasticities or other properties to provide desiredperformance characteristics as explained above.

The textile material 410 can be placed in a mold having a plurality ofcavities mimicking a frame as described above. Polymeric material isinjected into the mold cavities and flows around and/or throughdifferent components of the textile material. Generally, the polymericframe material encapsulates some portions of the textile material anddoes not encapsulate other portions of the textile material. Thepolymeric material is then allowed to cure within the mold. In so doing,it forms the runners, edge element, shooting elements and othercomponents of the frame.

Optionally, the mold can be configured in the same shape as the finishedpocket. For example, with reference to FIG. 12, an interior mold cavityof a mold can be of the same shape as the pocket 410 and runners andframe 440 shown there. Thus, when the pocket is formed, it includesthree dimensional contours, rather than being a flat, planarconfiguration.

After the frame cures, the pocket 410 can be removed from the mold.Again, where it is formed in a three dimensional form, the frame cangenerally continue to hold the pocket in its three dimensional form. Thepocket can then be attached directly to a lacrosse head using lacing413.

VIII. Fifth Alternative Embodiment

A fifth alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIG. 14 and generally designated 510. The pocket shown there is similarin structure function and operation of the embodiments described abovewith several exceptions. For example, the pocket 510 is also constructedfrom unitary textile material having different regions. There can be afirst region 511 located in the throat T of the pocket and/or head. Thefirst region 511 can correspond to the middle of the pocket 510M andextend to the lower portion 510L of the pocket. The second region 512can be located near the upper portion 510U of the pocket.

This embodiment, however, does not include conventional runners.Instead, it includes multiple shooting elements 541A, 541B and 541C.These elements can generally be of a convex or concave configurationgenerally pointing toward or away from the scoop and/or base, dependingon a particular application. Between each of these elements, additionalthird 513 and fourth 514 regions of the textile material can bedisposed. These additional regions 513 and 514 can offer a transitionbetween the first region 511 and second region 512. For example, thefirst region 511 may be a stretch region having a high elasticity,whereas the second region 512 may be a non-stretch region having a verylow elasticity. The third and fourth regions 513 and 514 can haveelasticities between that of the first region and the second region toprovide a ramped transition between those different regions. Additionalregions having different properties can also be implemented in thisembodiment. The unitary textile material 410 can include strategicallyplaced functional regions, such as stretch regions. Further, there maybe combinations of stretch, non-stretch and standard stretch regionsstrategically placed throughout the unitary textile material.

IX. Sixth Alternative Embodiment

A sixth alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIGS. 15-17 and generally designated 610. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, the pocket 610 canbe constructed to include multiple sections, namely a middle pocketsection 633 which is flanked on opposing sides by a first lateralsection 631 and a second lateral section 632. Between the middle pocketsection 633 and the lateral sections 631 and 632, intermediate sections635 and 634, respectively, can be disposed. These different sections canbe constructed from a textile material, such as those described in theembodiments above. All the sections can be part of a same, contiguous,uninterrupted unitary textile material, as described in connection withthe fourth alternative embodiment above, or alternatively, each sectionindependently can be constructed from a unitary textile material, withthe different sections joined along one or more seams. Further, eachsection can include different regions having different physical and/ormechanical properties within one or more of the different sections.

Optionally, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 17, the middle pocket section 633,intermediate pocket sections 634, 635 and first and second lateralsections 631 and 632 can be constructed separately from differentmaterials such as those described in connection with the embodimentsabove. These different materials can be joined at seams, which cancorrespond to the number of edges of the different sections that arejoined together. For example, as shown in FIG. 15, the lateral sections631 and 632 are joined with the intermediate sections 635 and 634 viathe seams 642 and 641, respectively. Such seams can be located at therespective edges of the different sections. A first lateral edge 633E1of the middle pocket section 633 can be joined with the first lateraledge 634E1 of the intermediate section 634. At this seam, those edgescan be joined with one another via thermal bonding along seams asdescribed in connection with the embodiments above, adhering and/orstitching the different sections together. Alternative constructions forjoining these different sections at these edges can be utilized as well.Optionally, as described above where the entire pocket is constructedfrom a unitary textile material, these different sections can beconstructed so that there are no edges due to the unitary structurebeing one piece and melding the different regions of the same textilematerial together.

The different structural sections can be joined with one another toprovide different functional aspects in different regions of the pocket.For example, the first lateral section 631 and second lateral section632 can have different properties than other sections. As a furtherexample, these first and second lateral sections 631 and 632 can includea first modulus of elasticity. The middle pocket section 633 can includethe same modulus of elasticity. In contrast, however, the intermediatesections 634 and 635 can include a second modulus of elasticity. Thesecond modulus of elasticity can be greater than the first modulus ofelasticity of the first and second lateral regions and the middle pocketportion 633. As yet a further example, the first and second lateralsections 631 and 632, and the middle pocket section 633 can be in theform of a non-stretch region and/or standard stretch region, asdescribed in connection with the embodiments above. The intermediatesections 634 and 635 however, can be constructed in the form of astretch region, as described in the embodiments above. This can enablethe first and second lateral portions and the middle pocket section toprovide some level of rigidity to the pocket in regions where it is sodesired. It also can enable the first and second intermediate regions tostretch and give as desired to provide enhanced ball retention withinthe pocket.

Optionally, the pocket along its length, from the upper portion 610U tothe lower portion 610L, or longitudinal axis LA can be segregated intodifferent areas including different stretch, non-stretch and/or standardstretch regions when taken along a line running left to right across thelongitudinal axis LA. As an example, pocket 610 can include a first area601, a second area 602 and a third area 603 along the longitudinal axisLA.

The first area 601, second area 602 and third area 603 can be disposedalong different portions of the length of the pocket along thelongitudinal axis. As an example, the first area 601 can be locatedalong a first quarter to a first third of a longitudinal axis LAextending away from the scoop. The second area 602 can be aboutone-third to one-half the length along the longitudinal axis LA. Thethird area 603 can be about a last quarter to a last third of the lengthalong the longitudinal axis LA of the pocket. Of course, these differentareas can be altered in location and the amount that they occupy alongthe longitudinal axis LA, depending on the particular function andcharacteristics of the pocket.

The first area 601, near the upper portion 610U, corresponding to aregion near the scoop, can be less stretchable, or generally lesselastic, to improve shooting capabilities from the end of the lacrossehead. To achieve this level of elasticity across the region, the firstand second lateral sections 631 and 632, and the middle pocket section633 can comprise optionally 60% to 95%, further optionally 65% to 85%,even further optionally 75%, of the material spanning from left to rightacross the pocket generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA.The intermediate sections 634 and 635, which can be constructed from amore stretchy stretch material having a higher modulus of elasticitythan the other sections 631, 632, 633 can comprise a smaller proportionof the material in that area 601. For example, the intermediate sectionscan collectively comprise optionally 5% to 40%, further optionally 10%to 30%, even further optionally 25% when taken across a line or planethat is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA.

The second area 602 can include more stretch material or the sections634 and 635 can comprise a larger portion of material taken along a lineperpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA within that area 602. Forexample, taken through a middle pocket region 610M, the pocket in area602 can comprise 30% to 70% of non-stretch or standard stretch material,located in the first and second lateral sections 631 and 632 and middlepocket section 633. The intermediate sections 634 and 635 can make upthe balance of that amount, ranging from 70% to 30%. Optionally, therecan be more stretch material or sections with higher elasticity withinthe second area 602 than non-stretch or standard stretch material orsections. This can enable the area 602 of the lacrosse pocket to be morestretchable, which can facilitate cradling of a lacrosse ball near thecenter or middle region 610M of the pocket.

The third area 603, near the lower portion 610L, corresponding to aregion near the base, can be less stretchable, or generally lesselastic, to improve shooting capabilities from the end of the lacrossehead. To achieve this level of elasticity across the region, the firstand second lateral sections 631 and 632, and the middle pocket section633 can comprise optionally 60% to 95%, further optionally 65% to 85%,even further optionally 75%, of the material spanning from left to rightacross the pocket generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA.The intermediate sections 634 and 635, which can be constructed from amore stretchy stretch material having a higher modulus of elasticitythan the other sections 631, 632, 633 can comprise a smaller proportionof the material in that area 601. For example, the intermediate sectionscan collectively comprise optionally 5% to 40%, further optionally 10%to 30%, even further optionally 25% when taken across a line or planethat is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA.

The different sections as mentioned above can include different modulusof elasticity. Of course, these different sections can also have otheror additional different physical and/or mechanical properties, forexample, different elasticity, different stiffness, different airpermeability or flow, different support, different recovery and/ordifferent rigidity as described in connection with the embodimentsabove.

It is further contemplated that the pocket of this embodiment caninclude different sections formed as a unitary structure havingdifferent regions that themselves have different properties. Forexample, the middle pocket section 633 can include a first region 633Aand a second region 633B. While the entire section 633 itself can beconstructed from a unitary textile material, the different regions 633Aand 633B can have different physical or mechanical properties such asthose mentioned above.

As a more particular example, the first region 633A can include a firstelasticity that is less than a second elasticity of the second region633B. Thus, along the longitudinal axis LA, the middle pocket section633 can be divided into different regions having different properties,and in particular, different elasticities. Of course, other sections caninclude or be constructed from a different piece of a unitary textilematerial as well, and those other unitary textile materials can includedifferent regions having different properties such as elasticity,stretch, rigidity, stiffness and the like as described in connectionwith the embodiments above. These different materials can be joined atseams, using thermal bonding, adhesives, stitching and/or a frame asdescribed in the embodiments above. Optionally, the different regions633A and 633B can have different properties via a combination ofdifferent types of strands constructed from different material withinthose regions. For example, the region 633A can be comprised of strandsconstructed from an aramid that is knitted or weaved to or from aportion in that region of the continuous unitary textile. These strandscan be knitted and/or weaved unitarily with strands constructed fromnylon in the region 633B. Due to the relative inelasticity of the aramidstrands, that region can be less elastic than the region 633A having thenylon strands. As another example, the region 633A can be constructed toinclude a more open, or open knit or weave structure. In other words,this region can be less dense and can have a strand density that isrelatively low compared to the strand density in the region 633B. Theother region 633B can be less elastic than the region 633A, even thoughthese two regions are unitarily formed with one another and part of aunitary textile material.

It is also contemplated that the different sections 631, 632, 634, 635and 633 can be integral with one another forming different portions ofthe same, one-piece unitary textile material as described in connectionwith the embodiments above. In such a construction, however, a framedescribed in the embodiments above, can be strategically associated withand/or segregate the different sections. If desired, the frame came beconstructed from the same polymeric material above, which can optionallyphysically encapsulate the different portions of the different sections.If desired, the frame can be located in the regions along differentintersecting portions of the different sections.

Of course, the frame can crisscross different sections, form shootingstrings and/or runners or the like, depending on the desired attributesof the frame. In one particular example, the frame can extend along theedges 633E1 and 633E2 of a middle pocket portion 633 along the entirelength of the longitudinal axis. Thus, the frame can form runners inthis location to assist in guiding the ball out of the lacrosse headwhen it is shot or passed. Optionally, the frame can be located in otherregions and further optionally around the outermost edges of thedifferent sections to provide a solid connection piece for the pocket tobe joined with a lacrosse head or to form lace holes in that part of theframe and/or pocket sections.

The different sections as illustrated in FIGS. 15 and 17 can havedifferent functions. For example, the first and second lateral sections631 and 632 can extend laterally inward toward the longitudinal axis LAgenerally away from the sidewalls 24 and 26. These sections can,particularly in the area 601, be generally planar or slightly concavewhen viewing the top of the pocket. In turn, the area 601 can berelatively flatter than the second area 602 and/or the third area 603.The intermediate sections 634 and 635 can be formed and sized to providea depth D2 of the pocket particularly in the second area 602, near themiddle region 610M of the pocket. These intermediate sections 634 and635 can also be sized and configured to form a specific angle β betweenthem and the adjacent first and second lateral sections 531 and 532,respectively. This angle β, as well as the depth D2, can be selected toprovide a desired depth and angle of a channel within the pocket 610from which the ball is launched. The angle β can range from 90° to 180°,further optionally 70° to 120°, even further optionally 45° to 60°,depending on a particular application and the desired depth and lengthof the ball channel.

The respective intermediate portions 634, 635 can be joined with themiddle pocket section 633 at their innermost edges closest to thelongitudinal axis LA. The middle pocket section itself can create atrack within which a lacrosse ball travels as it is shot or passed fromthe lacrosse head to which the pocket 610 is attached. Generally, themiddle pocket section 633 can form a substantially continuous yet curvedsurface from the upper portion 610U of the pocket 610 to the lowerportion 610L of the pocket. This section can be substantially planarfrom left to right across the longitudinal axis LA, but can undulate orform curves along or parallel to the longitudinal axis LA. In somecases, middle section 633 also can be of a longer overall length 633OLwhen laid flatter than the respective intermediate pocket sectionsand/or lateral pocket sections of overall length 635OL so that theintermediate pocket section can be joined with edges of those sectionsrespectively.

Further, although shown with only a single set of intermediate sections634 and 635, this embodiment can be outfitted to include multipledifferent intermediate sections. These intermediate sections can vary inelasticity or other physical and/or mechanical properties from themiddle pocket section 633 outward away from the longitudinal axis LA.Alternatively, the intermediate sections can be divided into differentportions along the longitudinal axis LA.

A method for manufacturing the lacrosse pocket 610 of the sixthalternative embodiment can be similar to the manufacturing methods ofthe other embodiments herein, and accordingly will not be repeated indetail here. Suffice it to say that the different sections 631, 632,634, 635 and 633 can be formed as different regions within a unitarytextile material, or optionally formed as different, separatelyconstructed pieces of material, whether unitary textile material orotherwise. These components can then be joined to form a new pocket. Inthis joining, the depth and respective angles of the ball channel anddifferent features of the pocket can be formed. Where the sections areconstructed from different, separate pieces, those pieces can be joinedvia thermal bonding, adhering and/or stitching the different piecesalong seams. If desired, a frame or a polymeric material can be moldedover and encapsulate different portions of the respective sectionsand/or regions, similar to the other embodiments herein.

X. Seventh Alternative Embodiment

A seventh alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustratedin FIG. 18 and generally designated 710. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, the pocket 710 canbe constructed to include multiple sections, namely runner pocketsections 741, 741′, 742, and 742′, perimeter portion 745S whichcorresponds to one side wall, 745S′ which corresponds to the other sidewall, and 745U which corresponds to the upper portion of the pocketadjacent the scoop 28 of the lacrosse head 20. All of these sections,for example the runners 741, 741′, 742, 742′, perimeter portions 745S,745S′ and 745U can all be constructed from a textile material whichitself is constructed from strands such as those described in theembodiments above. All of the aforementioned sections can be of the sametype of weave, knit or structural pattern and can exhibit desiredphysical and/or mechanical properties, and thus related performancecharacteristics. For example, these portions can be stretch, non-stretchand/or a standard stretch region as explained in embodiments above.Further each of these different sections can be part of the samecontiguous unitary textile material, for example, as described inconnection with the fourth alternative embodiment or sixth alternativeembodiment above. Of course, alternatively each of the aforementionedrunner sections 741, 741′ 742, 742′ and perimeter sections 745S, 745S′and perimeter section 745U can be constructed each from its own unitarytextile material with the different sections joined along one or moreseams, being sewn or joined with some sort of seam material such asthose described in the embodiments herein.

The pocket 710 also can include secondary filler sections such as 731,735, 734, or 732. Secondary filler section 731 can be disposed betweenthe perimeter section 735S and runner 741′. Secondary filler section 735can be disposed between runner 741 and 741′. Secondary filler section733 can be disposed between runners 741 and 742. Secondary fillersection 734 can be between the runners 742 and 742′, and section 732 canbe between the runner 742′ and the sidewall perimeter 745S′. Thesedifferent sections, for example the middle section 733 disposed betweenthe textile runners 741 and 742 can exhibit a lower elasticity orstretch than other sections of the pocket, such as tertiary section 737,and yet be more elastic or stretchable than the runners 741, 742 and/orperimeter portions 745S, 745S′. The secondary filler sections also canbe more open, and have a greater hole density than the respectiverunners. Generally the different materials in the different sectionsand/or runners can exhibit different material properties. Again, theymay be more open to allow air to flow therethrough and/or may be more orless stretchable than other portions of the pocket. In this manner,these sections can elastically deform and/or stretch to facilitatebetter ball handling.

Optionally, the secondary filler sections 731, 732, 734, and 735 can allbe constructed from the same textile material as the runners 741, 741′,742, 742′ 745S, 745S′; however, each of the sections can have differentknit and/or weave patterns or textures as mentioned above.

As shown in FIG. 18, and mentioned above, the pocket 710 can include oneor more tertiary sections 737. Such sections can be a hybrid between therunners 741 and 742, and the secondary filler section 733. As anexample, the tertiary section 737 can include major 737A and minor 737Bsections that crisscross and/or intersect one another, leaving largeopen apertures 737O between adjacent ones of those components and/or therespective runners 741 or 742. Generally, the openings 7370 are at least2, 3, 4, 5, 10, or 20 times larger than the openings defined by thesecondary filler portions, for example, the middle section 733. Thetertiary section also can be isolated to the lower half or third of thepocket 710, generally forming a portion of the pocket that can cradle aball when a ball is located in the lacrosse head and/or pocket. Therespective outer perimeter portions 745S and 745S′ flank these tertiaryportions and/or the runners on left and right sides of the pocket andcan generally be disposed adjacent to the side walls. Optionally thesesections 731 and 732 can be disposed between the runners 741′ and 742′and the respective outer perimeter portions 745S and 745S′, to providesome elasticity and flexibility between those respective components.

As another example, the middle pocket MP of this embodiment can becomprised of multiple different sections of a unitary textile material,all including different physical and/or mechanical properties, andassociated performance characteristics. The middle pocket MP can includethe outer perimeter portions 745S and 745S′, which transition to agenerally vertical secondary filler portion 731. This secondary fillerportion can be more flexible, elastic or stretchable than the perimeterportion 745S and can aid in hugging a ball located in the middle pocketMP. This secondary filler section 731 can transition to the runner 741which can include the same textile material, but including a differentdensity, pattern and/or texture. Optionally, the runner can be moredensely knitted and less stretchable or elastic than the secondaryfiller portion. Between the runner 741′ and the other runner 741, anadditional tertiary section 738 can be disposed. As mentioned above,this section, for example in the middle pocket, can be somewhat moreopen and even more stretchable than the runners and/or secondarysection. This tertiary section can transition to yet another runner 741,another tertiary section 737 and yet another runner 742 across themiddle pocket MP. From there, the pocket can include yet anothertertiary section 739 constructed from the same unitary textile material,but including the more open pattern than the respective runners. Thattertiary section 739 can transition to yet another secondary fillersection 732, which is similar to and includes similar performancecharacteristics as the section 731 on the opposite side. Thus, whileincluding a single unitary textile material, the middle pocket MP caninclude different regions of that material that are structured,patterned and/or textured differently to provide different performancecharacteristics. Other portions of a lacrosse pocket can likewise beconstructed from the unitary textile material, with different physicaland/or mechanical properties and associated performance characteristicsand/or attributes associated with different regions or sections of thepocket.

XI. Eighth Alternative Embodiment

An eighth alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIGS. 19-22 and generally designated 810. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, pocket 810 can beconstructed from a textile material, with all the different componentsbeing part of the same contiguous unitary textile material, as describedin connection with the fourth and sixth embodiments above. As anexample, each of the runners 841, 841′, 842, 842′ can be constructedfrom the textile material having a common knit or weave pattern, densityand associated physical mechanical properties, as well as associatedperformance characteristics. Other sections of the pocket, such as theshooting strings 845 can also be constructed from a similar type ofmaterial with a similar pattern and associated performancecharacteristics. The other sections disposed between respective runnersand/or sidewalls, for example, middle section 833 can be constructedfrom the textile material, except with the structural pattern ofmaterial in that region being substantially more open so that multipleopenings are formed within that region, which in turn can alterperformance characteristics. As a further example, the middle section833 can be constructed to include different upper 833A and lower 833Bportions between the respective runners 841 and 842. In the uppersection 833A generally above the lowest shooting string, this region canbe relatively taut to hold the shape of a shooting ramp between therunners 841 and 842. Generally, this section can be inelastic. The lowersection 833B, however, can be of a more open knitted, woven or meshconfiguration so that this pocket portion forms part of the ball channelbut is generally flexible and supple. It also can flow or sway from leftto right relatively easily, and is adapted to hug a lacrosse balldisposed in that portion 833B.

FIG. 20 shows a side perspective cross section taken along lines 20-20of the pocket 810. In this figure, the pocket 810 is illustrated invarying configurations, showing movement of certain portions of thepocket. As an example, the lower pocket section 833B moves relative tothe upper pocket section 833A. As shown in solid lines in FIG. 20, thepocket is in its relaxed state, which would correspond to a ball beingheld in the pocket. As shown in the broken lines, the pocket isillustrated as swaying toward and away from the scoop.

As mentioned above, this portion of the pocket 833B under the shootingstrings can be more flexible and less taut than the region above theshooting strings 845. The section 833A at or above the shooting stringsremains generally taut so that this corresponding feature of the unitarytextile material can engage the ball and propel it consistently in adesired direction. Optionally, the section 848 above the shootingstrings again can be generally taut.

As further illustrated in FIG. 20, the pocket 820 includes a reinforcedperimeter element 850. This reinforced perimeter element can be in theform of a binding that is constructed from a sufficiently wide portionof the unitary textile material. In this region, the textile materialcan be of a more dense pattern than the other regions. The reinforcedperimeter element can be integral and contiguous with the remainder ofthe unitary textile material. The reinforced perimeter element 850 alsocan include a predetermined width W1, which can optionally be 0.5 mm to5.5 mm, further optionally 1 to 3 mm, and even further optionally 2 mm.Respective net holes 850H can be defined entirely within that width W1without substantially weakening the top or bottom portion of thatreinforced perimeter element 850. If desired, the region immediatelyadjacent the holes 858 can be knitted in closed loops so that the holeincludes no free ends of strands extending outwardly into the hole whichoptionally could compromise the integrity of the reinforced perimeterelement 850.

The reinforced perimeter element 850 is configured to provide a strong,consistently formed, shaped and contoured portion that can be joineddirectly with the lower side walls of the head 20. In one optionalconstruction, a user can align the holes 50H of the reinforced perimeterelement 850 with the net holes defined by the lower rail of the head 20.The user can insert lacing through both holes and then optionallycontinuously lace the reinforced perimeter element or binding directlyto the rail.

In other optional constructions, the reinforced perimeter element 850can be molded directly into the bottom of the sidewall and held there inplace via the action of the material from which the lacrosse head ismade, encapsulating and embedding itself permanently within the textilematerial from which the reinforced perimeter element 850 is constructed.The remainder of the textile material, however, can be encapsulated bythe material from which the lacrosse head 20 is constructed, such asnylon or other polymers.

An example of the encapsulation of the reinforced perimeter element 850by a sidewall is illustrated in FIG. 21. There, the reinforced perimeterelement 850 is embedded and encapsulated within the lower portion sidewalls 24 and 26. During formation, the material from which the lacrossehead 20 is constructed flows around individual strands of the textilematerial at the front and rear surfaces of the material, andsubstantially encapsulates the textile material from which thereinforced perimeter element 850 is constructed. Optionally, where thetextile material of the reinforced perimeter element is sufficientlyjoined with the bottom of the respective side walls 24 and 26, the hole850H can be deleted.

FIG. 21 illustrates the flow or swayability of the pocket rearward ofthe shooting string 845. There, the left to right, or lateral movement,of the pocket is illustrated in broken lines. The pocket in this regioncan sway back and forth, to the left and to the right relative to alongitudinal axis LA of the pocket. FIG. 21 also illustrates the section847, located between the lowermost shooting string 845 and thereinforced perimeter element 850 and/or side wall. This section can beconstructed so that the textile material is relatively taut, and doesnot flow or sway like the portion of the pocket in broken lines.

FIG. 21 also illustrates certain channels or tubes that are integrallyformed in the textile material. Some tubes and channels are described inU.S. Pat. No. 8,839,532 to Huffa, which is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety. The tubes or channels can correspond directlywith the runners 841 and 842, in which case they can also be referred toas tube runners. In particular these runners 841 and 842 can define thetubes 841T and 842T, in which case they can also be referred to as tuberunners. Generally the tube runners can be constructed from the knittedor woven textile material and form two distinct layers 841I and 842Ilocated on the inside or ball facing portion of the pocket, and layers841O and 842O, which are located on the exterior of the pocket, oppositethe inside. These layers can transition directly to adjacent sections ofthe textile material, being integrally knitted, woven, or otherwiseincorporated into the textile material. These layers can transition backtogether to a single layer of the textile material, for example, inregions 849 and 848 that are immediately adjacent the runner 842. There,the inner layer of textile material 8421 can merge or blend back withthe separate outer layer 842O to form a single unitary layer 848 and/or849. This contrasts the open and separated construction adjacent thefiller material 842F where the interior layer 8421 and the exteriorlayer 842O of the textile material are separated to form an open spaceor tube 842T. Within this open space the respective runner can bestuffed or filled with a filler element or filler material. As anexample, the fill element 841F and 842F inside the runners can be athermoplastic polymeric material element that is generally supple andflexible. Optionally, the filler elements 841F and 842F can beconstructed from EVA foam, silicone, rubber, rope, cable, and/orintertwined strands of material. Further optionally, the filler elements841F, 842F can be elongated pieces of linked together parts, forexample, in the form of a linked chain constructed from a polymeric orcomposite links or other material.

With the filler elements 841F and 842F on the interior of the tuberunners 841 and 842, respectively, the inner layers 841I, 842I and outerlayers 841O and 842O can generally assume, take on and/or reflect theshape of those filler elements 841F and 842F. As illustrated, the fillerelements 841F and 842F can be the form of a structure having a circularcross section. In other constructions, the cross section of the fillerelements can be elliptical, square, triangular, polygonal or irregularshapes, depending on the desired shape of the ball channel. Althoughshown in conjunction with the runners, the layered structure of theunitary textile material can be duplicated or included within theshooting strings or other portions of runners.

A variation of the reinforced perimeter element 850 shown in FIG. 20 isillustrated in FIG. 22. There, the reinforced perimeter element 850′ ofthe knitted textile material is overmolded at its edge or its entiretyby a thermoplastic polymer. This is illustrated in the close up sectionview of FIG. 22A. There, the thermoplastic polymer 852′, which can beany of those described above, is molded over and encapsulates thereinforced perimeter element 850′ of the pocket 810′.

FIG. 23 illustrates an even further alternative construction, where thereinforced perimeter element 850″ includes upwardly extending lacedloops 850, 855″ which project from an upper edge of the reinforcedperimeter element. The lace loops can be overmolded with polymericmaterial so that the material flows through and encapsulates the laceloops, thereby securing the remainder of the pocket to the head. Asshown in FIG. 23A, the lace loops are overmolded by the lower rail 26 ofthe lacrosse head so that the loops form the connection between thereinforced perimeter element and the head 20. As illustrated in FIG. 23,the lace loops 855″ can be aligned with various structural members ofthe knitted textile material that extend across the width and/or lengthof the pocket 810″.

XII. Ninth Alternative Embodiment

A ninth alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIGS. 24 and 25 and generally designated 910. The pocket is generallysimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, in thisembodiment, the pocket can be constructed from two different components,namely an underlying continuous unitary textile material 912, and athermoplastic polymer layer 914 disposed over one or more surfaces ofthe unitary textile material.

The unitary textile material can be comprised of multiple differentsections including, for example, runners, 941, 942 intermediate section933 and side sections 932, which can be similar to the sections of theembodiments above. This unitary textile material can be knitted wovenfrom Kevlar or other generally inelastic, nonstretchable strands. Theshape of this textile can be pre-formed three dimensionally to mimic thedesired profile of a pocket.

On the ball facing, interior surfaces 912 of the textile material, agripping material 914 can be disposed. This gripping material can besomewhat elastic and can be of a predetermined durometer. As an example,the gripping material can be thermoplastic polymer, rubber, silicone, orany other suitable material. Generally this material can be relativelygrippy to impart a friction or grip against a lacrosse ball in thelacrosse pocket. The material can have a durometer of optionally 5 to 95Shore A, further optionally above 80 to 90 Shore A on the ASKER scale.

The precise overlaying of the gripping material 914 over one surface ofthe pocket can vary relative to the openings and patterns of the textilematerial layer 912. Generally, however, the interior face or ballreceiving surface, or select surfaces of the pocket that engage theball, can be covered with the gripping material. If desired, strips ofthe gripping material can cover the runners 941 and 942 which generallyform the ball channel of the pocket 910. This can provide additionalgrip on a ball, spinning it as the ball is shot from the head. Where thetextile material is not particularly grippy or has a low coefficient offriction, the addition of the gripping material optionally can provideenhanced performance.

XIII. Tenth Alternative Embodiment

A tenth alternative embodiment of the lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIGS. 26-31 and generally designated 1010. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, the pocket 1010can be constructed to include a contiguous, unitary textile materialforming a supportive, generally inelastic support skeleton 1050 and anovermolded, exterior skin 1040 encapsulating and substantially coveringthe textile material skeleton. The concept of the exterior overmoldedskin 1040 and interior textile material skeleton 1050 is generallyillustrated in FIG. 31. There, the textile material skeleton 1050 isfully encapsulated and embedded within the exterior skin material 1040,which can be a thermoplastic polymer or other materials as described inthe above embodiments. Optionally, the exterior skin material 1040 canbe transparent or translucent, so that a user can visually confirm thatthe pocket includes the internal textile material skeleton by viewing itthrough the exterior skin material. The textile material skeleton itselfcan be in the form of a knitted, woven, mesh, fabric or material, suchas those are described in the embodiments above. Further, the textilematerial can be woven from multiple strands as those described in theembodiments above.

Optionally, the textile material includes a multiple of first strands1051 and second strands 1052, disposed at right angles relative to oneanother. The strands can be interwoven with one another, with the firststrands 1051 intermittently extending over and under the second strands1052 to form a generally woven skeleton structure. The materials fromwhich the strands are constructed can have a low elasticity andelongation. This can enable the material to control the stretch of thehead in preselected regions, for example, between the shooting strings1045 and the scoop 28 and/or within the ball channel 1044 of the pocket1010 as shown in FIG. 26.

As shown in FIG. 31, the textile material skeleton 1050 can generallydefine polygonal open spaces 1053 between overlapping or adjacent firststrands 1051 and second strands 1052. In this particular configuration,two adjacent ones of the first strands 1051 are transverse to twoadjacent ones of the second strands 1052. These four respective strandsform the open space 1053. The polygonal open spaces alternatively can beconstructed as rounded openings or of other shapes. Generally the openspaces 1053 between the transverse strands 1051 and 1052 aresubstantially filled and encapsulated with the skin material 1040. Theovermolded material or skins seeps into and fully encapsulates all fourof the strands, thereby closing off the open space with the exteriorskin material. In this construction, there effectively is no openingthat extends from the ball receiving surface 1032 to the lower orexterior surface 1033 of the pocket 1010, at least between theindividual overlapping first and second strands.

In some locations, for example 1036 and 1037, as well as sections 1038and 1039, the pocket 1010 can include wide open pocket aperture wherethe pocket does not include either the textile material skeleton or theexterior material skin. Where these sections bound other sections suchas the ball channel 1044, that ball channel 1044 is allowed to swayand/or move more freely than other sections of the pocket.

The overmolded material that forms the skin can be thermoplasticpolymer, rubber, silicone, or any other suitable material. Generallythis material can be relatively grippy to impart a friction or gripagainst a lacrosse ball in the lacrosse pocket 1010. The material canhave a durometer of optionally 5 to 95 Shore A, optionally above 80 to90 Shore A on the ASKER scale.

The pocket 1010 also can define different thicknesses in differentregions. Generally, the textile material skeleton 1050 is of a uniformthickness, being constructed from a plurality of strands. Thus, in mostcircumstances it is not utilized to change the thickness of the pocket.The exterior skin material, however, can be molded in a way so as tomanipulate the overall thickness of the pocket in various regions. Thisis best understood with reference to the cross section shown in FIG. 30.There, the pocket includes a textile material skeleton 1050 whichextends from a first side 1010S1 of the pocket to a second side 1010S2.The textile material skeleton 1050 as shown is of a uniform thickness.The thickness of the skin 1040 however, varies from the first side1010S1 to the second side 1010S2, or along different axes depending onthe construction. The skin 1040 can include a first thickness T1 that isoptionally 0.1 to about 8.0 mm, further optionally 0.5 mm to 5.0 mm. T1can correspond to a perimeter or reinforced perimeter element 1046. Thereinforced perimeter element 1046 can be attached directly to thesidewall of the lacrosse head 20. The additional thickness in thisregion can provide added structural support for laces that optionallycan extend through holes 1046H defined in this portion of the pocket1010.

As the pocket transitions downward or generally toward the longitudinalaxis LA, the thickness of the overmolded material or skin is reduced toa thickness T2. This thickness T2 can be optionally 0.1 mm to 5.0 mm,further optionally 0.5 mm to 3 mm. This thickness can provide relativeflexibility and enhanced elasticity/stretch to the pocket in the region1047 which is immediately adjacent the reinforcement element 1046.

Between the reinforced perimeter element 1046 and the ball channel 1044,one or more additional runners 1048 can be formed with predeterminedthickness. These runners 1048 can be constructed from a centralencapsulated portion of the textile material skeleton and a thickenedarea of the skin forming the shape of the runner 1048. This thickenedregion can have a thickness T3 which is the same as or greater than thethickness T1, and greater than the thickness T2. Although shown asextending a greater thickness on both the interior and exterior of thepocket, the thickness T3 can be enhanced primarily on the interior.Accordingly, in such a construction, the outer runner projection 10480can be absent and only the inner runner projection 10401 can be present.

Near the ball channel 1044 of the pocket 1010, the exterior skinmaterial can be of one or more other thicknesses. For example, the ballchannel central region 1044C can be of a first thickness T5, which canbe greater than the thickness T2, optionally as great as the thicknessT1 or T3. This thickness T5 can range from optionally 0.2 mm to about 10mm, further optionally from 0.5 mm to 8 mm. The central portion 1044Ccan be flanked by runner projections 1041 and 1042, where the thicknessof the overmolded skin 1040 is of a thickness T4. This thickness T4 canbe the same for both runners 1041 and 1042, so that they cansymmetrically engage a ball traveling along or near the longitudinalaxis LA, out of the pocket. The thickness T4 can range optionally from1.0 mm to about 6.0 mm, further optionally about 2.0 mm to about 5.0 mm.This thickness T4 can be greater than the thickness T5, as well as thethickness T2 of the remainder of the net. With the increased thicknessesin T4 and/or T5 in the ball channel, the ball channel 1044 is welldefined, relatively rigid, and can provide good spin to the ball as itexits of the pocket. Near the scoop, the shooting strings 1045 can addrigidity and make that portion of the net more taut. In this region, theshooting strings can have thicknesses T3, T4 and/or T5, which aregenerally thicker than the surrounding thinner thicknesses T2 of theovermolded skin material. Of course, in these regions, as well as theball channel, the textile material skeleton can reduce and/or controlstretch of the pocket, which otherwise would occur if only the skinmaterial was used, due to its elasticity and generally low durometer. Bycombining the generally unstretchable, or only moderately stretchable,textile material skeleton with the generally elastic, stretchable,exterior material skin, the pocket can be fine-tuned to includedifferent regions of stretchability and/or reactivity.

To make the pocket of the current embodiment, a unitary textile materialis provided. Generally the textile material can include a substantiallycontinuous, unitary pattern. If desired, the unitary textile materialcan be comprised of different regions having different patterns,textures or performance characteristics.

The textile can be draped over a three-dimensional mold that mimics adesired pocket profile. The mold can define cavities that correspond torunners and/or shooting strings of varying thicknesses such as thosedescribed above. A thermoplastic polymer can be injected into the moldcavities, and can encapsulate the textile material skeleton. Spacesbetween individual transverse strands of the textile material are filledin. The respective components, for example the runners and/or shootingstrings of varying thickness are also therefore formed in theirrespective cavities. The textile skeleton becomes embedded within andsubstantially concealed and covered by the overmolded material.Alternatively, the textile material skeleton can be laminated to theovermolded material skin and secured thereto via molding or adhesion.This laminate construction can contrast the capsulation and embeddingtechniques utilized in the embodiment above.

After the pocket 1010 is constructed and cured within the mold, it canbe removed from the mold. When it is removed, sections of the skeletonand/or skin can be cut out from the pocket either manually or via a diecut machine. The parts cut out can correspond to regions whereadditional elasticity and/or deformation is desired, or where enhancedair flow through the pocket is desired to enable a player to easily whipand/or manipulate the head and associated pocket.

XIV. Eleventh Alternative Embodiment

An eleventh alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustratedin FIGS. 32-38 and generally designated 1110. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation of the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. For example, the pocket 1110can be constructed to be joined via molding, tying, gluing, stitchingand the like to the lacrosse head 20 at the respective scoop 28,sidewalls 24, 26 and base 22. The pocket however, includes an elongatedfirst pattern 1111 that is joined with a generally U-shaped secondpattern 1120, which is further optionally joined with a generallyU-shaped third pattern 1130. The elongated first pattern 1111 caninclude a portion of a shooting ramp 1135 that extends to a middlepocket MP1. The first pattern 1111 can be joined with the second pattern1120 at first seam 1141 and second seam 1142. These seams can be likethe seam runners described in the embodiments above. The differentpatterns can be constructed from unitary textile materials that areconstructed from a plurality of strands as described in the embodimentsabove. The textile materials can be formed using any of the knittingand/or weaving processes and/or machinery as described herein. Furtheroptionally, the different patterns can be constructed from meshmaterials which can be formed using mesh making processes.

Generally, the first, second and third patterns can be joined with oneanother to form a three dimensional bulge 3DB as shown in FIG. 33 from aside view that approximates a preformed, pre-shaped lacrosse pocketadapted to readily capture and retain a lacrosse ball therein.

The different patterns can be joined with one another at their edgesusing a variety of different constructions. For example, the patternscan be stitched, glued, adhered, fused, melted, thermally bonded or overmolded with respective pieces or parts to join them at their seams. Inone embodiment as illustrated in FIG. 32, the respective patterns areflat lock stitched to one another. Other stitching techniques can beutilized as well. Where the respective edges of the different patternsare joined, a corresponding structural stitch, glue part, adhesive part,fused part, melted part, thermally bonded part or over molded part canbe disposed.

As shown in FIGS. 33-35, the pocket as constructed with the unitary,textile and/or mesh material can be formed so that it maintains a threedimensional concave shape having a defined depth DD generally in themiddle of the pocket MP1. With this shape being built into the pocket1110 itself, and with the pocket able to retain this shape upon itsconstruction, the pocket herein requires minimal break in. It also isextremely consistent from one pocket to the next and able to beprecisely replicated on a mass commercial scale.

As shown in FIGS. 32-34, the pocket includes a first pattern 1111, asecond pattern 1120 and a third pattern 1130. Each of these patterns candefine a respective longitudinal axis LA1, LA2 and LA3. As shown in FIG.32, the longitudinal axis of the first pattern LA1 is aligned with thelongitudinal axis LA2 of the second pattern as well as the longitudinalaxis LA3 of the third pattern. When independently constructed, ofcourse, the longitudinal axes of each of the patterns can be offset andnonparallel with one another, depending on the different sheets andmaterials from which they are cut, formed or otherwise constructed.

A first pattern can include at least a portion of a ball channel bottom1136, at least a portion of the shooting ramp 1135 and at least aportion of a pocket bottom 1136B. The first pattern can be elongated andcan include a first pattern exterior edge 1113. This exterior edge 1113is configured for placement immediately adjacent and optionally attacheddirectly to the scoop 28 of the head. This exterior edge 1113transitions to a first pattern first edge 1114 and a first patternsecond edge 1115 which extend rearwardly away from the scoop 28generally toward the ball stop 23 or base 22 of the head 20 when thepocket 1110 is attached to the head 20. These edges 1114 and 1115 can besubstantially linear and can extend through the shooting ramp 1135,optionally outside the respective shooting ramp flanks 1137. Asillustrated, the first pattern first edge 1114 lays across thelongitudinal axis LA 1 from the first pattern second edge 1115.

The edges 1114 and 1115 can extend rearwardly toward a terminating edge1116 of the first pattern. This terminating edge 1116 can be acontinuation of the respective edges 1114 and 1115. As illustrated, theterminating edge 1116 can generally be rounded or U-shaped. Of course,in other constructions, it can be more angular and/or polygonal. Nearthis rearward terminating edge 1116, the middle pocket MP1 can bedisposed. This middle pocket MP1 can be the location where the ballnaturally rests within the pocket when the pocket is held in theorientation shown in FIG. 33. The predefined depth DD of the pocket inthe middle pocket MP1 can be substantially equal to or less than thediameter of a NCAA Rule compliant lacrosse ball, for example, 62.7 mm to64.7 mm.

The first pattern 1111 can be constructed from a knitted, a weavedand/or a mesh material. Optionally, multiple different types of knitted,weaved and/or mesh materials can be joined with one another integrallyor at seams to form the first pattern 1111. Indeed, the first patterncan be comprised of multiple patchwork pieces that are sewn, stitched,glued, adhered, fused, melted, thermally bonded and/or over molded.

The first pattern 1111 can be constructed from a first material on aknitting machine and/or a weaving machine, or alternatively constructedfrom mesh on a mesh machine. That first material can be constructed tohave a first mechanical or physical property. For example, the firstmaterial can include a first elasticity, opening size, or configurationand/or rigidity. The second pattern 1120 can be constructed from asecond material having a second mechanical or physical property. Forexample, the second material can have a second elasticity than isgreater that the first elasticity or the second material can have asecond opening size being greater than the first pore size in which casethe overall density of the second material in the second pattern 1120 isless than that in the first pattern 1111.

Turning now to the second pattern 1120, as shown in FIGS. 32, 34 and 36,it can include a forward exterior edge 1121 that transitions to a secondpattern first edge 1124 which itself transitions around a junction 1128of the second pattern and into a second pattern second edge 1125 thatextends upwardly on an opposite side of the longitudinal axis LA2 of thesecond pattern. The second pattern also includes a second pattern firstexterior edge 1126 and a second pattern second exterior edge 1127 thatgenerally surround the second pattern on its exterior most portions.

The second pattern as illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 36 is generally of aU- or V-shape, and defines a void 1129. Within that void 1129, the firstpattern 1111 is disposed. In its final state, the respective firstpattern first and second edges 1114 and 1115 are joined with the secondpattern first and second edges 1124 and 1125, respectively, to close thevoid 1129. As also shown in FIGS. 32 and 36, the second pattern 1120 canform a first wing 1120R and a second wing 1120L that are joined via thejunction 1128. The second pattern and the wings flare outward to form atleast portions of the shooting flanks 1137. The overall width of thefirst pattern 1111 can vary, optionally being greater near the exterioredge 1113 than near the middle pocket MP1. Specifically, W4 can begreater than W5 as shown in FIG. 36. Of course, in some constructions,the width can be constant, that is, W4 can be equal to W5 and all widthstherebetween.

In general, the respective first and second wings 1120L and 1120R canflank the first pattern 1111 on opposing sides of the longitudinal axisLA1 of the first pattern. As shown in FIG. 34, the second pattern 1120near the junction 1128 can include a rearward wall 1128R. This rearwardwall can extend generally toward a ball stop 23 of the head when thispocket is installed in the head. This rearward wall can be slanted orgenerally concave upward. This rearward wall 1128R can transition torespective pocket side portions 1128SP of the second pattern whichthemselves can transition to the forward flares 1128F that can includethe respective shooting flanks 1137 and/or portions of the shooting ramp1135 as illustrated in FIGS. 34 and 35. These respective sidewallportions 1128SP can be generally slanted and/or concave upward relativetoward the sidewalls of the lacrosse head to which the pocket isattached. As shown in FIG. 34, the slanted and/or rounded sidewallportions 1128SP can transition to a generally flat and/or planar andslightly concave bottom 1136B.

As shown in FIGS. 32-36, the pocket 1110 also can include a thirdpattern 1130. This third pattern can include an interior edge 1138. Thisinterior edge 1138 can extend generally from a forward edge or tip 1138Fof the third pattern 1130 rearward into the ball stop portion 1139B ofthe third pattern. This interior edge 1138 can be joined directly withthe exterior edge 1127 of the second pattern 1120 using any of thetechniques disclosed herein. The third pattern 1130 also can be of a V-or U-shape and can define a second void 1139V between respective wings1130L and 1130R of the third pattern. Within that void, the first andsecond patterns can be disposed and secured. The third pattern also caninclude an exterior edge 1139 that can be adapted to be joined directlyto a lacrosse head, as well as a ball stop portion 1139B. The ball stopportion 1139B of the third pattern also can be upwardly slanted and/orconcave toward a ball stop of the head to which the pocket is attached.This ball stop portion 1139B can transition to side pieces 1139SP. Theseside pieces can generally be more sharply angled upward relative tohorizontal than the side portions 1128SP of the second pattern. This canadd to the overall depth DD of the pocket as shown in FIG. 33.

Referring to FIG. 36, a method of making the lacrosse pocket of theeleventh alternative embodiment will now be described in further detail.A lacrosse pocket can be started by providing the first pattern 1111 ina flat two dimensional form, as illustrated in FIG. 36. The pattern asformed can be constructed on at least one of a knitting machine, aweaving machine and/or a mesh making machine. The material from whichthe first pattern is constructed can include one or more differentregions having different physical and/or structural properties. Forexample, the entire region of the first pattern 1111 can be knitted toinclude a single knit pattern. Alternatively, multiple differentpatterns of knit or weave can be utilized so that those differentregions exhibit different physical and/or structural properties, forexample, different elasticities, air permeabilities, rigidity, etc. Ofcourse, the entire first pattern can be of a unitary singleconstruction.

Separately, the second pattern 1120 initially can be constructed in aflat two dimensional form as well. The second pattern can include thesecond pattern first interior edge 1124 and second pattern secondinterior edge 1125. The second pattern also can include the respectiveexterior edges 1127. As constructed, the second pattern can define thefirst void 1129 between the first edge 1124 and the second edge 1125,generally aligned with and/or bisected by the longitudinal axis LA2 ofthe second pattern. The void also can be defined between the first 1120Land second 1120R wings of the second pattern. Optionally, as mentionedabove, the second pattern can be constructed from knitting, weavingand/or mesh making processes and can include one or more regions.Further optionally, the regions being knitted, weaved or otherwise madedifferently to include different physical and/or structural propertiesto provide different performance characteristics. In some cases, thesecond pattern can be knitted and/or weaved so that it is more elasticthan the first pattern and third pattern. Alternatively, the secondpattern can be knitted so that it is the same elasticity or a lesserelasticity than the selective first pattern and third pattern.

As illustrated in FIG. 36, the overall width W7 between the respectivesecond pattern first edge 1124 and second pattern second edge 1125, orthe wings 1120L and 1120R is substantially greater than the widths W5and/or W4 of the first pattern. Thus, when the edges 1124, 1125 arejoined with the edges 1114 and 1125, the second pattern, and inparticular its wings, tend to angle or become curved upwardly toward afront face of the pocket. This causes the side pieces 1128SP and therearward wall 1128R to round out or become more slanted relative tovertical. In this manner, the flat two dimensional form of the secondpattern is reconfigured into a more three dimensional form. Likewise,the first pattern 1111 also is bent and reconfigured to a threedimensional form to produce at least a portion of the ball channeland/or shooting ramp of the pocket when its edges are joined with theinterior edges of the second pattern. This, in turn, causes the firstpattern to attain a flat, or upwardly rounded, or convex portion of theramp 1122 as shown in FIG. 34.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 36, as the second pattern is joined with thefirst pattern, at least a portion of the middle pocket bottom 1136B isplaced adjacent to at least a portion of the side portions 1128SP.Further, at least a portion of the shooting ramp 1135 of the firstpattern 1111 is placed adjacent to at least a portion of the shootingramp flanks 1137 that are associated with the wings 1120L and 1120R ofthe second pattern 1120. The respective edges of the first pattern andthe second edges can be joined via at least one of stitching, gluing,adhering, fusing, melting, thermally bonding and over molding the firstpattern edges with the second pattern edges.

Optionally, the second pattern first wing 1120L is bent or folded towardthe second wing 1120R. Alternatively, the first and second wings areeach respectively bent towards the longitudinal axis LA2 of the secondpattern. This bending causes the second pattern junction 1128 totranslate upward to form an upwardly slanted or curved wall that slantsor curves upwardly toward a ball stop of a lacrosse head to which thelacrosse head pocket is adapted to be joined. As mentioned above, uponthis bending, the respective sidewall portions 1128SP also curve orslant generally upwardly at a first angle. This, in turn, creates agenerally 3D configuration shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 of the first patternand second pattern attached to one another.

In another step, the third pattern 1130 can be formed in a flat, twodimensional form. The third pattern can include a third pattern firstand second interior edges 1138 that are disposed across one another onopposite sides of a third pattern longitudinal axis LA3. The thirdpattern can define the second void 1139V with the respective wings 1130Land 1130R disposed on opposite sides of the void 1139V, across thelongitudinal axis LA3. The third pattern 1130 interior edges 1138 can bejoined with the respective exterior edges 1127 of the second pattern1120. As this is performed, the respective wings 1130L and 1130R arebrought toward the respective longitudinal axis LA3 of the thirdpattern. This, in turn, causes the rearward wall 1139B of the thirdpattern to angle or slant to translate upward to form an upwardlyslanted wall that slants upward toward a ball stop.

The respective third pattern side portions 1139SP also slant upwardlynear the ball stop generally, at a second angle that is greater than thefirst angle of the side portions 1128SP in this region. In turn, thethird pattern 1130 can provide a greater vertical component of the depthDD of the pocket shown in FIG. 33 than the vertical component providedby the second pattern 1120. As mentioned above, the third pattern can beconstructed from a unitary textile material and can be formed byknitting, weaving or mesh making processes and machines. Because thewidth W8 of the void 1139V is greater than the overall width of thesecond pattern 1120, taken across an axis transverse to the longitudinalaxes along the pocket, the respective third pattern wings and rearwardportion or rearward wall all angle upward substantially to provideadditional depth to the pocket. In turn, the middle pocket MP has adownwardly extending three dimensional bulge. Due to the configurationof the different patterns, the elongated ball channel also transitionsto the shooting ramp.

The pocket 1110 of the eleventh alternative embodiment can beconstructed to include one or more attachment elements 1151, 1152, 1153that assist in joining the pocket 1110 with a lacrosse head 20. As shownin FIGS. 37 and 38, exemplary attachment elements are illustrated. Itwill be appreciated that other types of attachment elements such assimple strings, loops or apertures defined in the respective edges ofthe patterns can be utilized for connection.

As shown in FIG. 37, the first pattern 1111 includes a first attachmentelement assembly 1151. This assembly can be in the form of a base strip1151B which is attached to multiple extensions 1151E that extendoutwardly, away from the main body of the third pattern 1111. Theattachment element assembly, and in particular the base, can be joinedwith the third pattern, optionally adjacent the exterior edge 1113 ofthe first pattern by gluing, adhering, stitching, fusing, melting,thermally bonding and/or over molding the attachment element 1151 to thefirst pattern 1111. In the particular example shown in FIG. 37, theattachment element 1151 is constructed from a polymeric material such asTPU. The TPU is molded over the exterior edge 1113 of the first patternso that the polymeric material encapsulates and embeds within thenetwork of strands that make up the first pattern 1111 at the exterioredge. The polymeric material can extend through minute pores andopenings defined by the knitted or weaved textile material and/or mesh,joining with other portions of the over molded material to form aphysical bond with the network of strands in that area. When it ismolded, the attachment element can include the base 1151B and theextensions 1151E. The other attachment elements 1152 and 1153 canlikewise be joined with the respective second pattern 1120 and thirdpattern 1130 in a similar manner.

Optionally, the extensions 1151E can be folded over one another, endover end as shown in FIG. 38. When so folded over, the ends 1151N ofeach extension 1151E can be stitched with a stitching 1151S or otherwiseglued, thermally bonded or welded to the base 1151B and/or to itself.This, in turn, forms a loop through which a string or lace 1159 can beplaced to secure the attachment elements and the respective patterns(after being adjoined with one another to form the completed threedimensional pocket) to a lacrosse head. In this manner, the attachmentelements can assist in joining that three dimensional pre-shaped pocket1110 to a lacrosse head.

XV. Twelfth Alternative Embodiment

A twelfth alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustrated inFIGS. 39-42 and generally designated 1210. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above, and in particular, the fourth embodiment describedabove and illustrated in FIGS. 11-13 and generally designated 410, withseveral exceptions. For example, the pocket 1210 can be constructed froma mesh material, rather than a unitary textile material that is knittedor weaved. The mesh material can include a plurality of strands that arejoined together to form a mesh on a mesh making machine. The mesh canhave uniformly sized holes or openings defined within a network ofcrisscrossed or otherwise joined lateral, vertical and/or diagonalcomponents or strands. The mesh can be generally contiguous throughout,with a single pattern of the mesh extending throughout the entirepocket.

Optionally, one or more seams, such as a central seam 1212 can beincluded in the mesh lacrosse pocket. As shown there, the seam 1212 canhold together opposing edges of the mesh generally along a longitudinalaxis LA of the pocket. The seam can be formed by stitching, gluing,adhering, fusing, melting, thermally bonding and/or over molding freeedges of the mesh together with one another. An example of over moldingas shown above is shown in FIG. 13 in the fourth embodiment above.

With the seam 1212 joining edges of the mesh generally in the middlepocket or throat of the head 20, that middle pocket MP3 can generallyform a rearward extending bulge 1214 when viewed from the perspective inFIG. 41. When viewed from the perspective of FIG. 40, in the inside ofthe pocket, the middle pocket MP3 and/or throat generally includes aconcave three dimensional shape across a portion of the width W9 of thelacrosse pocket 1210 as shown in FIG. 40. Further optionally, the meshcan be joined at the seam so that it forms a lengthwise concave threedimensional shape along a length of the lacrosse pocket 1210, leadingfrom the ball stop 23 toward the scoop 28 of the lacrosse head 20. Ofcourse, other constructions and concavities or features can be includedin the mesh depending on the particular application.

As shown in FIGS. 39-42, the pocket 1240 can be constructed to that itincludes a generally flexible frame 1240. The flexible frame 1240 can beattached to one or more parts of the mesh material. The frame can beconstructed from a polymeric material such as a thermoplastic polymer,for example, thermoplastic polyurethane, as well as synthetic andnatural rubbers, foams and/or other polymers. Optionally, the materialcan be of sufficient dimensions or constructed from an elastic materialto allow certain portions of the flexible frame to elongate and/orstretch, optionally 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 or more its originaldimension. In turn, this ability to elongate can enable the pocket toact more like a suspension element when a ball impacts or lands in thepocket, which can prevent the pocket from overly rebounding the ball orbouncing it out of the pocket. Certain portions of the mesh material andits strands are encapsulated by and embedded within the material fromwhich the frame is constructed, while other portions of the meshmaterial are not encapsulated nor embedded within the frame, in whichcase they can be exposed to the environment and visible to a viewer.

As shown in FIGS. 39-41, the frame 1240 can include multiple components.For example, the frame can include first 1241 and second 1242 runners.The runners can extend generally from an upper portion 1210U of thepocket toward the middle pocket MP3. Optionally, the runners 1241 and1242 can be parallel, and can extend along the longitudinal axis LA.Near the middle pocket MP3, the runners can diverge outwardly asillustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40 and join directly with an edge element1244 of the frame. As shown in FIG. 40, the runners can flare outwardly,away from the longitudinal axis until intercepting and/or intersectingthe edge element 1244 of the frame. The edge element 1244 of the framecan extend from the ball stop along the respective sidewalls 24 and 26and adjacent the rearward edge of the scoop 28. This edge element 1244can add rigidity to the upper portion of the pocket where it is joinedwith the frame.

Alternatively, the edge element 1244 can be stretchable and/or elastic,in which case it can function as a suspension element. For example, theedge element 1244, as well as the other parts of the flexible frame, canbe constructed from an elastomer, such as natural or synthetic rubber,polyisoprene, polybutadiene, polyisobutyiene, and/orpolydimethylsiloxane. Optionally, this elastic edge element can have adurometer that optionally is at least 15 Shore A, and further optionallyless than 100 Shore D, and even further optionally less than 90Rockwell.

The elastic edge element can be able to undergo large elasticdeformations, that is, it can stretch and return to its original shapeand dimensions in a reversible way. As an example, the edge element caninclude a width extending from below a side rail or scoop of the head.When a lacrosse ball enters the pocket forcibly, and some velocity, theball engages the mesh pocket, which in turn pulls or puts tension on theedge element causing it to stretch elastically, sometime stretching toan extended width that is optionally 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 ormore its original width. This enables the mesh pocket to “give”somewhat, acting like a suspension element to provide a soft landing forthe ball. With this reaction of the edge element, it prevents the pocketfrom rebounding the ball out of the pocket. After the initial impact andstretching, due to the elastic nature of the edge element, that edgeelement returns to its original un-stretched configuration.

As illustrated in FIG. 42, the pocket 1210 and in particular the meshcan be molded directly into the frame of the lacrosse head and inparticular, the lower rim of the sidewall 24. The mesh 1213E embedded inthe sidewall 24 is of a sufficient amount to anchor the pocket to thatsidewall 24. Generally, the material from which the sidewall 24 isconstructed, for example, nylon or some other polymer, substantiallyencapsulates the mesh 1213E that is ultimately embedded within thatsidewall 24. This provides a solid adjoinment of the mesh with thesidewall.

To bolster that and add rigidity to the mesh, the edge element 1244 ofthe frame 1240 can be further joined with the mesh, immediately adjacentthe sidewall 24 as shown in FIG. 42. There, the edge element 1244 (likethe remainder of the frame) can generally encapsulate the mesh 1213. Thematerial from which the edge element is constructed can also penetratethrough the openings in the mesh to form opening fillers 1244O, whichsubstantially fill the openings between adjacent strands 1213S of themesh 1213. If desired, the interior 1244I of the edge element 1244, aswell as any other elements of the flexible frame, can include a taper1244T so that the overall thickness of the edge element or other framecomponent generally thins from one side to the other. Alternatively, theedge element or other component of the flexible frame can thin from amiddle portion to outermost portions on opposite sides of thatcomponent. This construction can reduce weight of the flexible frame,and/or can be utilized to channel or maintain a ball in a particularorientation within the pocket 1210.

Optionally, the edge element 1244 and the other components of theflexible frame are not molded directly to the components of the lacrossehead 20. Instead, the lacrosse head is simply molded over the componentsof the mesh, for example, the encapsulated portions of the mesh 1213E asshown in FIG. 42. Of course, in other embodiments, the frame 1240 itselfcan encapsulate the outermost edges of the mesh. In such a construction,the edge of the frame can fit within a groove defined by the sidewallsand other head components. It can be glued, adhered, or friction fitwithin this groove.

In other constructions, the head can be molded over the edge of theframe to join these components. For example, where the edge element iselastic and configured to act like a suspension element to dampen therebound of the pocket upon capture of a lacrosse ball, the edge elementcan be molded over by the head. As shown in FIG. 42A, the portion of thelacrosse head, for example the rail 24′, is molded over the edge element1244′ of the flexible frame. In this construction, the elastic edgeelement can be anchored in the rail 24′, with the mesh 1213′ embeddedwithin and encapsulated by the edge element 1244′, but not the rail orother portions of the lacrosse head. This is so that the primaryconnection between the mesh 1213′ and the head is via the elastic edgeelement 1244′. In this manner, the elastic edge element 1244′ can besubstantially the only item connecting the mesh to the head. Thus, anyforces transferred to the mesh, for example, by a ball, also aretransferred to the elastic edge element, which is allowed to stretch andprovide relative movement of the mesh away from the lacrosse head.

As illustrated in FIG. 42A, an upper portion of the elastic edge elementcan include an enlarged head or anchor 1244A′. This anchor can assist inphysically and mechanically retaining the edge element in the rail. Theanchor can transition to a generally vertical web 1244V′, which extendsto and out the bottom 24B′ of the lacrosse head portion or rail. Theportion of the web 1244V′ extending out the bottom can include the mesh1213′ embedded within and encapsulated by that portion of the web1244V′. Generally, the mesh does not extend into the portion of the webabove the bottom 24B′. This is so that the edge element is free tostretch outside the rail, unconstrained or unimpaired by the lowerelasticity of the mesh, and/or so that the mesh can move away from theremainder of the lacrosse head.

Because the edge element is elastically deformable, force from theimpact of the ball engaging the pocket can cause the elastic edgeelement to temporarily deform, for example stretch from its originaldimensions to some greater dimensions, then return to the originaldimensions. This is illustrated by comparing the width 1244W′ when theedge element is in an un-stretched state, to the width 1244W″ (in brokenlines) when the edge element is in a stretched state, for example, afterthe ball impacts the mesh 1213′, pushing on it, and thus stretching theedge element. Again, due to the stretch in the elastic edge element, themesh and remainder of the pocket is able to move somewhat away from thelacrosse head, acting as a suspension element to thereby prevent theball from bouncing out of the pocket.

Returning to FIGS. 39-42, optionally, the flexible frame 1240 can beoutfitted with one or more shooting strings 1240S which can be placed inregions of the mesh corresponding to shooting strings.

A method for manufacturing a lacrosse head including the lacrosse pocket1210 of the twelfth alternative embodiment will now be described.Generally, the mesh material is constructed from a plurality of strandson a mesh making machine. The mesh can be cut in an area correspondingto the middle pocket MP3, with a section of the mesh removed there. Theremaining edges of the mesh in the middle pocket MP3 can be joinedtogether at a seam 1212 utilizing any of the techniques identifiedabove.

The mesh pocket so formed can be placed within a lacrosse head mold (notshown), with its outermost edges disposed in a mold cavity. Polymericmaterial, from which the lacrosse head is to be made, can be injectedinto the mold cavity. As this occurs, the portions of the mesh 1213E asshown in FIG. 42 are encapsulated by and embedded within the sidewall 24the opposing sidewall of the scoop in the base. This in turn selectivelysecures and joins the mesh 1213 and the pocket 1210 with the head. Thehead is allowed to cure.

After it is cured, the head 20 and the now attached lacrosse pocket 1210are removed and placed in second mold (not shown). The second mold caninclude a mold cavity that extends over selected portions of the mesh,generally in the areas of the runners, edge element and any optionalshooting strings. Another material, such as a thermoplastic polymer suchas TPU, is injected into the mold cavity. When so injected, itencapsulates and embeds within the mesh material, for example, as shownin FIG. 42. After the flexible frame cures, the pocket and an assembledhead can be removed from the second mold.

XVI. Thirteenth Alternative Embodiment

A thirteenth alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustratedin FIGS. 43-49 and generally designated 1310. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above with several exceptions. To begin, the thirteenthalternative embodiment 1310 of the lacrosse pocket and its componentsare constructed from a unitary textile material and is manufactured fromstrands, which like the embodiments above, can be in the form ofthreads, cables, yarn, fibers, filaments, cords and other strand-likeelongated structures. Strands, however, optionally can exclude largediameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/or greater than 3.0 mm)laces, thongs or nylon webs that are manually tied or connected to oneanother or other structures. The entire unitary textile material can beproduced through machine implemented, mechanical manipulation of strandson an automated pocket assembly machine thereby producing weaved,knitted or some other textile material.

Optionally, large diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/orgreater than 3.0 mm) laces, webs and strings are not knitted or weaveddirectly with the strands of the unitary textile material. However,these large diameter or dimension laces, webs or thongs can be snakedthrough tubular components or other structures integrally formed in theknitted or weaved structure as described below or placed through holesdefined by the knitted or weaved structure. This is not the same asthose elements being knitted (interlooped) or weaved with the strands ofthe unitary textile material; and this contrasts conventionaltraditional lacrosse pockets, which are formed almost substantially fromlarge diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/or 3.0 mm) laces,webs, runners and thongs.

As noted above, a strand encompasses threads, cables, yarn, fibers,filaments, cords and other strand-like elongated structures. Certainconventional strands have an indefinite length and can be combined withother strands to produce a yarn for use in textile materials. Thestrands used in this embodiment can be constructed from materials suchas thermoplastic polymers, such as nylon, polypropylene, high densitypolyethylene, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, as well asaromatic polyamide and other polymeric materials. Other abrasionresistant and durable material likewise can be implemented. As explainedbelow, the forgoing materials can be mixed and matched within a singleunitary textile material, making up a pocket to provide differentmechanical and physical properties in different regions of the pocket asdesired. As mentioned above, the pocket is a unitary textile material.Unitary textile materials can be produced via machine implementedmechanical manipulation of the strands, thereby producing a weaved orknitted material. The lacrosse pocket 1310 generally can be constructedautomatically, by manipulating strands using various techniquesimplemented on a machine (rather than performed manually by a human).The various techniques include knitting, weaving, intertwining and/ortwisting, the latter two of which are generally encompassed by knitting.

The pocket of this embodiment can be constructed on a textilemanufacturing machine, such as a knitting machine and/or a weavingmachine. A knitting machine utilized to construct one commercialembodiment of the pocket 1310. Knitting includes interlooping strands ina series of connected loops, optionally forming multiple columns ofloops. In weaving, multiple strands are crossed and interweaved over andunder one another at right or other transverse angles to each other atintersections. Strands used in weaving are usually characterized as warpand weft yarns. Intertwining and twisting can include techniques such asknotting and braiding, where strands intertwine with one another.Generally, knitting can encompass intertwining and twisting herein. Suchmachines are capable of producing knitted materials with a high degreeof precision and reproducibility. With a pocket constructed from aunitary textile material as described herein, a particular pocket andits configuration can be reproduced or replicated with extremeprecision. For example, from one pocket to the next, the dimensionselasticity, stretchability, contours are virtually identical when thepocket is installed in a lacrosse head. Further, where the unitarytextile material pocket of the embodiments herein is molded directlyinto the material of a lacrosse head, it provides an advantage overpockets and heads of prior art. For example, almost all conventionalmesh and traditional pockets over the years have been manually laced bya pocket stringer to the head. Depending on the stringer's talents,skills and preferences, the way that the pocket is strung to the headcan vary considerably from one pocket to the next. With the currentembodiments, that variability is overcome. Each pocket can bereconstructed and replicated precisely down to the same number ofthreads in every component of the lacrosse pocket. Further, where thepockets are molded into a head, the molding operation for the same canbe precisely replicated from one head to the next. Thus, the variabilityin the head and pocket combination can be significantly reduced.

Due to this leap forward in pocket and head manufacturing capability,customers also can obtain lacrosse heads having a high degree ofcustomization. For example, a particular player can have a preferredpocket profile. That profile can be determined and/or digitally capturedor three dimensionally mapped into an automated pocket assembly machine.The automated pocket assembly machine, such as a knitting or weavingmachine, can be programmed with data and/or code relating to or based onthe preferred pocket profile. The machine can then precisely replicatethat pocket profile in the form of a knitted or weaved lacrosse pocketwhich can then be installed in a lacrosse head. Generally, with theembodiments herein, a high degree of consistency can be achieved inmanufacturing lacrosse pockets and complete heads, which can benefitplayers because they can know what to expect when they purchase a newlacrosse head with pocket.

Returning to FIGS. 43-49, the pocket 1310 can be installed in a lacrossehead 20. The pocket 1310 can extend from a scoop 28 toward the ball stop23 and can be joined with the sidewalls 24 and 26. The pocket 1310 canbe specially knitted and/or weaved in a particular manner on a knittingor weaving machine to create different zones A-E.

Optionally, zone A is a zone of release, where the ball last touches thepocket before exiting from the head 20. The lower portion of this zone Acan be bounded by a first shooting string and/or element 1345A. Thisshooting string element can be in the form of a conventional largediameter lace, for example greater than 2.0 mm diameter, which is joinedwith the unitary textile material as described further below.

The next zone B toward the ball stop 23 can be referred to as a catchingzone. Generally, it is located between the first shooting string element1345A and the second shooting string element 1345B. Along the sides ofthe lacrosse head, however, that zone B material extends rearwardlytoward the ball stop 23. This portion of zone B can also form thebeginning of a shooting ramp SR. The second shooting string 1345B can berelatively taut as it forms the start of the shooting ramp.

The next zone C of the unitary textile material pocket 1310 can be atransition zone which generally forms the midpoint of shooting ramp SR.This zone C can be bounded between the second shooting ramp element1345B and the reference lines 1345C as illustrated. If desired, therecan be a shooting string in the form of a large diameter lace joinedwith the head in this construction.

As illustrated in FIG. 43, zone D can encompass a loading zone, wherethe pocket is generally supple and flowing to hold a lacrosse ball LBshort of the ramp. Generally, this zone D is adjacent a fourth referenceline 1345D, which also can be optionally in the form of a shooting rampelement when included.

The lacrosse head also can include a pocket also referred to as a middlepocket MP4, located generally in zone E. Although shown approximate ⅓-½the distance from the ball stop 23 to the scoop, the precise location ofthe middle pocket MP4 can vary depending on the desired performancecharacteristics of the lacrosse pocket and head. In some cases, MP4 canbe moved higher, closer to the scoop 28 than as shown in FIG. 43. Inother cases, the middle pocket MP4 can be moved closer to the ball stop23.

The unitary textile material forming the lacrosse pocket 1310 and inparticular the lacrosse pocket main body 1310B is in the form of asingle material element having a unitary construction. This unitaryconstruction encompasses a configuration where the different regions orportions of a unitary textile material are not joined together by seams,stitches, adhesives or molded features, but rather the primary joiningof the different regions is via mechanical manipulation of theindividual strands making up the unitary textile material in thedifferent regions to join those different regions as explained furtherbelow. This mechanical manipulation can be performed with an automatedpocket assembly machine, for example, a knitting machine is mentioned inthe embodiments herein, and/or a weaving machine. Of course, other typesof automated machines capable of manufacturing the pocket without anymanual manipulation of the strands during the automated process are alsocontemplated.

While the pocket and pocket body 1310 and 1310B are constructed from aunitary textile material, each can include different regions havingdifferent physical and/or mechanical properties. These physical and/ormechanical properties from region to region can vary. For example, thedifferent regions can have different elasticities, different stretchcapabilities, different stiffnesses, different air permeabilities and/orpore sizes, different air flow through it due to the pore or openingstructure, different support, different recovery and/or differentrigidity. The physical properties described in connection with theseembodiments, however, generally do not include aesthetic properties suchas color, hue, shading or visual pattern differences.

As shown in FIG. 44, the lacrosse pocket body 1310B generally includesseveral different regions. As mentioned above, the pocket includes amiddle pocket MP4 which transitions at a transition T to a shooting rampSR. The shooting ramp SR is disposed between knitted or weaved runners1341 and 1342. These runners are integral with the unitary textilematerial from which the lacrosse pocket 1310 is constructed. The runnerscan include a more densely knitted pattern to provide enhanced rigidityand generally taut structures to better guide a ball being shot from thehead 20. The runners can be constructed so as to extend from a regionadjacent or forward of the middle pocket MP4 outward toward the scoop 28as shown in FIG. 44. Optionally, the runners can be constructed as shownin FIG. 46 to extend from an upper portion 1310U to a lower portion1310L of the pocket, optionally stopping short of that lower portion1310L as shown in FIG. 46. The runners can be constructed to beapproximately 4-7 needles wide, further optionally about 3 to about 15needles wide, depending on the particular knitting machine utilized toknit the pocket. The runners can generally transition directly to theupper edge 1310U of the lacrosse pocket 1310 which generally provides asolid mounting location for those runners, particularly given theamounts of force that the runners are under as a ball moves through theshooting ramp SR.

Optionally, if desired, the runners 1341 and/or 1342 can be speciallyconstructed to be less elastic than the remainder of the main body ofthe pocket. In turn, this can provide a more defined shooting ramp, alsoreferred to as a ball channel, for the lacrosse ball to exit from thelacrosse head. As one example, the runners can be more densely knitted(with more courses and/or wales) or weaved than other portions of thepocket, such as the perimeter flange, the middle pocket and/or theshooting ramp flanks. In such a case, the runners can include anotherknit pattern which is different from the knit patterns of the perimeterflange, the middle pocket and/or the shoot ramp flanks. As anotherexample, the runners can include less openings defined therein ascompared to other portions of the pocket body. As yet another example,the lacrosse pocket body can be formed of a single unitary knit pattern.In the regions of the first and second runners, the strands can bedifferent from the strands and other regions adjacent those runners. Thestrands in the regions of the runners can be less elastic than thematerial and adjacent regions. As a more particular example, strands inthe regions of the runners can be constructed from an inelastic materialsuch as metal strands, carbon or composite strands, or high tensilestrength polymeric strands, while strands in adjacent regions, whileconstructed from the same knit pattern, can be made of thermoplasticpolymers or some material that is less elastic than that of the strandsin the runners. Even in these other constructions, however, the lacrossepocket body, and in particular the unitary material from which it isformed, can include the first and second runners integrally formedtherein without the addition of separately and/or independentlyconstructed structures to the lacrosse pocket body.

Further optionally, to construct runners with different materials thanthe remainder of the lacrosse pocket, one or more additional spools ofmaterial can be added to the automated assembly machine. In particular,the spools can include a continuous strand of material constructed frommaterials different from other strands used in other portions of thelacrosse pocket. Where it is desired that the runner be less elasticthan the remainder of the pocket, the continuous strand can beconstructed from a material that is less elastic than other strands usedin other portions of the pocket. The continuous strand of differentmaterial can be pulled off the dedicated spools holding the same.

Even further optionally, due to the mechanical manipulation of thestrands used to make the pocket, the knitting and/or weaving machine canbe programmed to knit or weave the runners 1341 and/or 1342 in aparticular direction. For example, most traditional constructionsinclude runners that are parallel to a longitudinal axis of the pocket,and centered about the longitudinal axis. In the current embodiments, itis contemplated that the first and second runners can be disposed at avariety of angles relative to the pocket longitudinal axis LA. Forexample, although not shown, the first runner 1341 can be configured todiverge at an angle of about 5° to about 45° away from the pocketlongitudinal axis LA as the runner transitions from the base toward thescoop. Conversely, the second runner 1342 can be configured to convergeat an angle of about 5° to about 45° toward the pocket longitudinal axisas the runner transitions from the base toward the scoop. Further, thefirst and second runners can be configured so that they are not centeredon the pocket longitudinal axis at the upper edge of the pocket. Forexample, the first runner 1341 can be configured to join with the upperedge of the pocket a distance to the left of the pocket longitudinalaxis LA. The second runner 1342 however can be configured to join withthe upper edge of the pocket at the pocket longitudinal axis LA. Thisconstruction can be reversed with the second runner 1342 offset adistance to the right of the pocket longitudinal axis, while the firstrunner 1341 passes through the pocket longitudinal axis LA adjacent theupper edge. These different types of offset runners can be customized toaccommodate a player's shooting techniques and/or the desired exitlocation of the lacrosse ball.

Returning to the embodiment shown in FIG. 44, the upper edge 1310U canbe adapted to attach directly to the scoop 28 of the head. This can beaccomplished by adding large diameter lacing to the pocket and lacingthe pocket directly to the scoop. Alternatively, as described below, thepocket edges and/or a perimeter flange can be molded directly into theframe of the lacrosse head. The lower edge 1310L can correspond to aportion of the pocket adapted to attach to a base or ball stop 23 of thelacrosse head 20 as shown in FIG. 44. The pocket can be bounded by firstand second sidewall edges 1314 and 1316 as well. These sidewall edges1314 and 1316 can be of the same general knit pattern as the upper edge1310U and the lower edge 1310L. Generally, this knitting pattern can beconstructed so that the respective edges and/or the perimeter flange1310PF in general, are optionally 1.0 mm to 20.0 mm, further optionally2.5 mm to 15.0 mm, further optionally 5.0 mm to 10.0 mm in overall edgewidth EW as shown in FIG. 46.

The edges, 1310U, 1310L, 1314 and 1316 as well as other regions of thepocket depending on the application, can be constructed from a firstmaterial, which can be less elastic, and/or more abrasion resistant anddurable than the second material. Optionally, the first material can beat least one of an aromatic polyamide and an ultra-high molecular weightpolyethylene. One suitable aromatic polyamide is poly-para-phenyleneterephthalamide, sold under the commercial name of KEVLAR® by DuPont ofWilmington, Del. The first material optionally can have strands having:a tensile modulus of elasticity of optionally 400-1000 g/d, furtheroptionally 500-900 g/d, and even further optionally at least 500 g/d; anelongation at break of optionally 1.0% to 10.0%, further optionally of3.0% to 2.4%, further optionally 3.6%; a breaking tenacity of optionally100-300 cN/tex, further optionally 150-250 cN/tex, even furtheroptionally 203-208 cN/tex; and a tensile strength of optionally about2,000-10,000 MPa, further optionally 3,000-6,000 MPa and even furtheroptionally about 3,600 MPa. This first material can be less elastic andmore abrasion resistant and durable and tear resistant than the secondmaterial used in for example, the middle pocket shooting ramp orshooting ramp flanks.

Further optionally, the second material can be a thermoplastic polymer,for example high density or high strength polyethylene, polypropyleneand/or a polyethylene multi-fiber yarn. The second material optionallycan have strands having: a modulus of elasticity of optionally 0.1-2.0GPa, further optionally 0.5-1.0 GPa; elongation at break of optionallygreater than 50%, further optionally greater than 100%, even furtheroptionally greater than 500%; and a tenacity of optionally 20-350kN/tex, further optionally 30-320 kN/tex, and even further optionally50-100 kN/tex, and even further optionally less than 150 kN/tex. Thesecond material can include strands optionally in a range of 100 Denierto 1000 Denier, further optionally 150 Denier to 840 Denier, evenfurther optionally 210 Denier to 750 Denier, yet further optionally 300Denier and/or 420 Denier.

If desired, the first and second materials can include a UV inhibitor toprotect the strands when the pocket is used in direct sunlight. Ofcourse, the entire pocket can be constructed from the first material andsecond material, only one of the two materials, and/or other additionalmaterials depending on the application.

As mentioned above, within the boundaries of the edges described above,the pocket body 1310B can include other features or components. As shownin FIG. 46, the pocket body can include runners 1341 and 1342. Theserunners can be constructed from the second material and/or the firstmaterial mentioned above. The pocket body also can include shooting rampflanks SRF1 and SRF2. These can be disposed laterally of thelongitudinal axis LA shown in FIG. 46, and further laterally of theshooting ramp SR and respective runners 1341 and 1342.

The shooting ramp flanks SRF1 and SRF2 can be constructed from thesecond material mentioned above as well. The shooting ramp flanks caninclude one or more knit patterns that are different from knit patternof the edges. For example, the first and second shooting ramp flanksSRF1 and SRF2 can include a second knit pattern 1318 and a third knitpattern 1319. The pattern 1318 can be more open yet relatively thick andthree dimensional, forming large openings 13180 within that knit region1318. The thickness of this region, however, can be such that it canrender this region relatively taut even when placed under tension, forexample, when disposed or molded into a lacrosse head. With reference toFIGS. 47 and 47A, the shooting ramp flanks SRF1 and SRF2 can includeregion 1319, which can be a layered knit pattern. For example, as shownin the cross section of the third knit pattern 1319, the unitary textilematerial within that third knit pattern can define an optional tubularstructure or channel 1319C. This tubular structure can be formed from afirst knitted layer 1319A and a second knitted layer 1319B which arejoined with immediately adjacent knitted pattern 1318. In particular,the tubular structure can be formed by knitting a ripple stitch in thepocket. Within this structure, the layers 1319A and 1319B include aplurality of strands that extend outward and are interlooped withportions of the immediately adjacent knitted pattern of 1318. Likewise,the plurality of strands that make the knit pattern 1318 also extendinto and are interlooped with strands in the first and second layers1319A and 1319B. These layers themselves are integrally formed with oneanother and within the unitary textile material. They are separated adistance, which in turn forms the tubular structure or internal channel1319C.

Optionally, the third pattern 1319 can be deleted, and in which case thesecond pattern 1318 can be continuous and uninterrupted by the thirdknit pattern making up its respective layers. Of course, where the thirdpattern is included, it can provide an additional functionality. First,it can exert different mechanical properties in the region. Asillustrated in FIGS. 46 and 47, the third knitted pattern 1319 canextend transversely across the width of the pocket. In so doing, it canprovide additional mechanical properties in this region, for example, itcan make the pocket in the region more taut than other regionssurrounding the third pattern, for example, the second pattern 1318.

If desired, the tubular structure 1319C also can be interrupted inregions 1319K and 1319L as shown in FIG. 47. In this construction, thetubular structure can extend from one sidewall edge 1314 to the opposingsidewall edge 1316, but can be interrupted and open in preselectedareas. In those areas, the runners 1341 and 1342 however are generallycontiguous and uninterrupted. Given their ability to form and guide theball in the shooting ramp, in the embodiment illustrated, it sometimesis more helpful to have the runners uninterrupted than the tubularstructures 1319C formed within the knitted textile. Of course, incertain applications, this can be reversed if desired.

As shown in FIG. 51, in a finished head, the tubular structures 1319Ccan include a large diameter (greater than 2.0 mm) lace threaded throughthem to act as defined shooting strings that are precisely locatedwithin the lacrosse pocket due to the tubular structures 1319C. With thetubular structures, there also leaves little room for error whenprecisely locating the laces within the lacrosse pocket body.

The large diameter laces 1317 can extend transversely through and acrossthe lacrosse pocket, being partially concealed within the tubularstructure 1319 and optionally intermittently exposed in certain regions,for example, adjacent the runners 1341 and 1342. Of course,alternatively, the large diameter laces can be completely sealed withinthe tubular structures or reversed so that they are only exposedintermittently on the rear of the lacrosse pocket 1310. Optionally,additional third knit pattern 1319 can be included in the head, forexample, another shooting string element can be disposed closer to thebase or ball stop 23 of the head as shown in FIG. 50. Another lace 1317can be threaded through the respective tubular structure andintermittently exposed in certain areas. The laces 1317 or some othertype of elongated element can be placed within the tubular structure1319C. The elongated element is generally free floating relative to thetubular structure. However, in some cases, the elongated element can bestitched, adhered or hot melted to the tubular structure surrounding itso that relative movement between the two structures can be limited.

The tubular structure 1319C in the third pattern 1319 can include aplurality of strands that are interlooped via knitting, or weaved withstrands of the adjacent second pattern 1318. Indeed, many of the strandsof the third pattern can extend into and are interlooped with thestrands of the second pattern. Further, some of the strands arecontinuous, with one of a plurality of strands extending through thesecond knit pattern 1318 also extending through the third knit pattern1319, and/or other knit patterns. Accordingly, the different knitpatterns can be contiguous and/or continuous with one another, beingintegrally sewn and connected via a plurality of continuous strandsextending through both.

The precise interlooping of the knitting pattern or the precise weave ofthe weave pattern can vary depending on the strands and the desiredpatterns and their interfaces. Generally, however, as illustrated inFIGS. 47 and 47A, the transition between the different knit patterns,for example, 1318 and 1319 are imperceptible due to the extension of thestrands of each of those respective patterns extending into both. Ofcourse, this is accomplished via the special techniques implemented viathe associated knitting and/or weaving machine associated with theknitting and/or weaving process used to construct the entire pocket. Asillustrated, there are no defined “edges” that form the terminatingboundaries of the respective regions or patterns, for example patterns1318 and 1319. Further, there is no separate stitching, gluing, overmolded portions or large diameter (greater than 2.0 mm) laces, thongs orwebs that join the different patterns of the pocket.

Optionally, a plurality of knit patterns can come together and becontiguous and continuous with one another, integrally formed in thesingle, unitary textile material. As shown within the circle B in FIG.47, the first pattern 1314C of the edge 1314 is joined and transitionsseamlessly to the second pattern 1318, as well as the third pattern1319, which itself includes the tubular structure 1319C. These differentpatterns are capable of merging into one another seamlessly, withouthaving to join different edges or structures, other than the interloopedor interweaved strands of each pattern. Further, each of these differentknit patterns are formed as an integral unit by the knitting and/orweaving process on a knitting machine and/or weaving machine. Thus, whenthe machine is done knitting, no further components or structures needbe added to the pocket to join these different knitting patterns. Thiscan eliminate human interface with the construction of the pocket viamanual manipulation of different parts of the pocket.

Turning to FIGS. 44, 47 and 49, the pocket can be constructed to includea shooting ramp SR as mentioned above. Again, this shooting ramp can beflanked by the shooting ramp flanks SRF1 and SRF2. When initially formedby the knitting or weaving machine in any of the respective knittingand/or weaving processes, the respective shooting ramp flanks SRF1 andSRF2 can include a generally planar or convex configuration. By convex,it is meant that the respective shooting ramp flanks SRF1 and SRF2generally bulge or bow upward when the pocket is placed in the generallyhorizontal configuration as shown in FIG. 49.

As shown in FIG. 49, the shooting ramp SR can include several differentknit and/or weave patterns in the unitary textile material from whichthe pocket 1310 is constructed. For example, the shooting ramp SR caninclude and be partially bounded by the first and second shooting ramps1341 and 1342. Again, these ramps can be constructed from a certain typeof knit pattern, for example, a knit pattern including the generallycontiguous surface being approximately 5-10 needles wide. Optionally,these ramps can be constructed from interlooped strands or interweavedstrands of a different color than surrounding knit patterns so that auser can visually perceive the runners.

The shooting ramp SR also can include a portion of the second knitpattern 1318 toward the end of the shooting ramp, near the upper edge1310U. The shooting ramp also can include a portion of the third pattern1319, further optionally with its tubular structure 1319C. Of course,where an elongated element, such as a large diameter lace is placedthrough the tubular structure, that elongated element can also passtransversely through the shooting ramp SR. As the shooting ramptransitions rearwardly, and the middle pocket MP4 and the lower edge1310 of the pocket, yet another knit pattern can be included. This knitpattern 1350 can be different from the first, second and third knitpatterns described above. This knit pattern 1350 can transition to therespective runners 1341 and 1342, as well as the patterns 1319 and/or1318.

As shown in FIGS. 47-49, the pattern 1350 defined within the shootingramp SR can be part of the unitary textile material from which thepocket 1310 is constructed. This knit pattern 1350 can include aplurality of vertical elements 1351 intermittently joined via aplurality of join elements 1352. The vertical elements 1351 (FIG. 47)can generally be somewhat parallel with one another, extending generallyparallel to the longitudinal axis LA of the lacrosse pocket 1310. Thesevertical elements 1351 can extend from the portion of the shooting rampSR closer to the upper edge 1310U of the pocket and generally rearwardlytoward the lower edge 1310L (FIG. 46). Certain ones of the verticalelements 1351 can be joined with the lower edge 1310L and integrally,continuously knitted and/or weaved to that edge.

The vertical elements 1351 can be constructed so that they will expandaway from one another, generally providing a supple and elastic regionas they transition closer to the middle pocket MP4. The width of any ofthe vertical elements, particularly when knitted on a knitting machine,can be adjusted to provide desired mechanical and physical properties ofthe knit pattern 1350. For example, in some cases, where the pocket isweft knitted on a tubular knitting machine, the vertical elements 1351can be optionally less than 15 needles wide, further optionally lessthan 10 needles wide, even further optionally less than 8 needles widewhen knitted on a knitting machine. Incidentally, as used herein, theterm needles can be interchangeable with the term wales, which is knownin the knitting arts. In some cases, the vertical elements are less than7 needles wide so that the vertical elements do not begin to merge withone another, forming a continuous knit pattern that generally does notinclude any of the knit pattern apertures 1353, for example, as shown inFIG. 47. When that occurs, sometimes the knit pattern 1350 can becometoo rigid and stiff, which can affect the ability of the middle pocketMP4 to effectively grip a ball disposed therein. Generally, each of therespective vertical elements 1351 maintains a constant width 1351W as ittransitions from the shooting ramp SR rearward through the middle pocketMP4 into the rear edge or lower edge 1310L. This can enable theplurality of strands making up each of the respective vertical shootingelements 1351 to be continuous and extend throughout the entirerespective vertical elements.

Optionally, the vertical elements 1351 can be knitted in the form oftubular elements. A cross-section of a vertical element 1351 is shown inFIG. 48B. There the vertical element is constructed in the form of aknitted tubular structure. The knitted tubular structure includes afront face 1351F and a rear face 1351B. Each of these individual facesare constructed from respective front and rear needle beds during theknitting process. These faces also can be connected and joined with oneanother at the respective sides 1351E1 one and 1351E2. The front andrear faces are, however, separated from one another on their interiorswhich face one another. Thus, the faces cooperatively form a cavity orchamber 1351H. This chamber 1351H extends along the length of thevertical element a preselected distance, optionally along the entirevertical element. It is this interior chamber, bounded by the front andrear faces that gives the vertical elements the generally tubularstructure. It is to be noted that in some cases, the front and rearfaces in particular their interior facing surfaces 1351SI can engage andcontact one another. In such a configuration, the chamber 1351H canappear collapsed and can have minimal to no volume.

Further optionally, depending on the pocket and desired features, otherstructures of the pocket can be knitted in the form of tubular elements.For example, the runners 1341 and 1342, the perimeter flange 1310PF orother elements of the pocket can be constructed in a similar manner toinclude the knitted tubular structure described above. Indeed, thepocket can be constructed from a variety of different or similar tubularstructures, combined with other flat knit patterns or other knitpatterns as desired.

As mentioned above and as shown in FIGS. 46-49A, the vertical elements1351 can be joined with one another with a plurality of join elements1352. These join elements 1352 can be constructed from a plurality ofstrands that are interlooped with the respective strands of therespective vertical elements 1351. Optionally, the joins can beconstructed with an Intarsia knitting process or technique, furtheroptionally by knitting two adjacent areas in an overlapped manner with aknitting machine. Even further optionally, the joins 1352 can beconstructed by overlapping the rows, also referred to as courses herein,that form adjacent vertical elements. As an example, a join 1352 a canbe formed by at least partially overlapping a row of knitting of thevertical element 1351C1 with another row of adjacent vertical element1351C2. In some cases, another row from vertical element 1351C2 canoverlap another row of the vertical element 1351C1. This can be repeatedmultiple times, overlapping certain portions of rows from adjacentvertical elements, until a join of desired dimension is achieved.

Referring to FIGS. 46-49A, the join elements 1352 can extend laterallyof each of the respective vertical elements 1351 joining adjacent onesof those vertical elements 1351. The spacing of the joins can be variedin transitioning from the shooting ramp SR rearward toward the middlepocket MP4 and further toward the rear edge 1310L of the pocket 1310 orpocket body 1310B.

For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the join elements 1352 can be morewidely spaced or distanced from one another along a respective verticalelement 1351 in some areas than in others. Optionally, knitted rows fromadjacent vertical elements can overlap one another at more frequentintervals to form more frequent joins. As shown in FIG. 48, the joinsnear the middle pocket MP4 can be spaced from one another so as to formopenings 1353O. These openings can be of different sizes and shapes fromthe openings 1353S near the shooting ramp SR. In some cases, theopenings 1353O near the middle pocket MP4 can be 2, 3, 4, 5, even 10times longer or larger than the openings 1353S near the shooting ramp.In turn, this enables the vertical elements 1351 near the middle pocketMP4 and/or the apex 1355A of the pocket.to more easily spread apart fromone another, and thus become more supple and pliable to accommodate andoptionally restrain a lacrosse ball disposed in the middle pocket MP4.This also can provide a greater sag in the middle pocket MP4 to bettergrip the ball. In contrast, with the smaller apertures 1353S there is anincreased number of join elements 1352 in the shooting ramp SR, or thereare more join elements per unit of distance in that region, so that thevertical elements 1351 cannot generally expand as much or distancethemselves from one another as easily as in the middle pocket MP4. Inturn, this creates a more rigid and/or taut knit pattern within theshooting ramp SR, which can be conducive to the ball easily rolling offor through that shooting ramp.

Optionally, as shown in FIG. 48, two or more vertical elements, forexample 1351C1 and 1351C2 can extend continuously from the shooting rampSR all the way to the lower edge 1310L. These vertical elements 1351C1and 1351C2 can be attached to one another via a plurality of joins 1352.The frequency of the joins can decrease nearing the bullseye opening1350B from either or both the shooting ramp direction or the directionof the upper edge of the pocket. With such a construction, the openingswithin the pattern of the middle pocket become progressively larger inarea as they near the bullseye opening 1350B. Accordingly, the openingswithin the pattern of the middle pocket, and in particular those betweenthe vertical elements 1351C1 and 1351C2 become progressively smaller inarea as they increase in distance from the bullseye opening and/or theapex of the pocket. This progressive decrease in the overall area of theopenings can occur in any direction emanating outward from the bullseyeopening 1350B. The bullseye opening 1350B can be the largest dimensionedopening defined by the lacrosse pocket, and can have the largest area ofany opening defined therein. Further optionally, the middle pocket candefine multiple different sized openings formed as the pocket isproduced via an automated assembly machine, such as a knitting machine.Each respective opening of the middle pocket can be bounded by at leastone vertical element in at least one join element. The distances betweenthe joins along the adjacent vertical elements can vary, depending onthe desired area of the opening and its location within the middlepocket.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the unitary textile material from which thepocket 1310 is constructed can be specifically knitted and/or weaved bya respective knitting and/or weaving machine to include a predefinedthree dimensional concave shape integrally formed in the single type oftextile. By predefined, it is meant that the machine, whether a knittingor weaving machine, automatically manipulates the plurality of strandsin such a manner so that they achieve the respective three dimensionaland/or planar shapes. These parameters can be preprogrammed into themachine.

Referring to FIG. 49A, the three dimensional contours of the pocket 1310optionally can be formed by manipulating the plurality of strands toform vertical elements having varying numbers of rows, and thus varyinglengths. More particularly, as mentioned above, the middle pocket MP4and shooting ramp SR can be comprised of multiple vertical elementsspanning from or adjacent the lower edge 1310L toward the upper edge1310U of the pocket 1310. These vertical elements can collectivelycooperate to form the side to side curvature, for example 1355C′, aswell as the longitudinal curvature 1355C9 of the pocket. Thesecurvatures as well as other features, whether flat, planar, convex orconcave or some other configuration, can collectively form the threedimensional contour of the pocket. The vertical elements can becomeprogressively shorter in length the farther they are laterally disposedfrom the longitudinal axis LA.

For example, the vertical element 1351C2, which can form at least aportion of the bullseye opening 1350B, can be longer than the verticalelement 1351C8 that is adjacent the runner 1342. As a more specificexample, the length L8 of vertical element 1351C8 can includeapproximately 100 rows of knitted stand, whereas the length L2 of thevertical element 1351C2 can include approximately 300 rows of knittedstrand. With more rows, the respective vertical elements become longerin their respective lengths. Optionally, the central vertical elementsnear or adjacent the apex or bullseye opening can include 50, 100, 150,200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 or 500 more rows than the lateral verticalelements near the sides of the pocket. The other intermediate verticalelements 1351C4 and 1351C6 can include lengths L4 and L6 having a numberof rows between the number of rows of the vertical elements 1351C8 and1351C2. For example, 1351C4 can include 250 rows and vertical element1351C6 can include 150 rows. The precise ratio of rows in one verticalelement relative to another vertical element can vary depending on theintended contour and curvatures 1355C9 and 1355C′. In some cases thenumber of rows in the vertical elements can increase by at least 5%,10%, 25%, 50% or more as the vertical elements are disposed fartherlaterally from the longitudinal axis LA. Likewise, depending on theparticular depth and desired curvatures 1355C′ and 1355C9 of the pocket,the number of rows in each vertical element can be varied. Further, itis to be understood that the vertical elements 1351C1, 1351C3, 1351C5etc. on the other side of longitudinal axis LA, can be of a decreasinglength, as the vertical elements are disposed farther from alongitudinal axis LA.

The vertical elements or other features within the shooting ramp SR canbe constructed so that when the pocket 1310 is knitted and/or weaved, itforms a three dimensional concave contour 1355C. This concave contour1355C can extend through and laterally across at least a portion of theshooting ramp SR. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, this concave shape orcontour 1355C can gradually increase in depth as is transitions towardthe middle pocket MP4. Of course, the precise concavity within thisthird pattern of the unitary textile material can vary depending on thelocation in the pocket. For example, in the shooting ramp SR, theconcavity can be generally less than the concavity in the middle pocketMP4. Optionally, this concavity can be controlled by the number of joinsbetween respective vertical elements. Again, for example, with morejoins 1352 joining the adjacent vertical elements, those verticalelements 1351 can be closer to one another and less prone to expandingaway from one another. This, in turn, can reduce the concavity of thethird knit pattern 1350 within the shooting ramp. The overall widthbetween the respective runners 1341 and 1342 also can be decreased dueto increased number of join elements. Thus, a ball exiting the pocketcan begin to ride up onto the runners 1341 and 1342, generally, comingup and out from the middle pocket MP4 onto the shooting ramp SR.

As shown in FIGS. 46-48, the knit pattern 1350 can transition to and/orinclude a middle pocket MP4. This middle pocket MP4 can be configuredand specifically knitted and/or weaved so that it is generally suppleand can hug a lacrosse ball when disposed therein. This can enable aplayer to better cradle the ball, keeping it within the pocket during aparticular maneuver.

Optionally, the middle pocket MP4, like the shooting ramp SR, caninclude a plurality of vertical elements 1351 and joins 1352 generallyextending between those vertical elements. All of these components canbe constructed from a plurality of strands which are interlooped and/orinterweaved with one another in a continuous manner.

As explained above, the middle pocket MP4 can include joins 1352 thatare spaced farther from one another to create larger openings 1353O.Optionally, with reference to FIG. 48, the joins 1352A can be spaced asufficient distance from one another, for example, ¼ inch to 2 inches,further optionally ½ inch to 1½ inches, even further optionally ¾ inchto 1¼inch away from one another along the longitudinal axis LA of thepocket. This allows the immediately adjacent vertical elements 1351 tospread apart from one another, particularly when a lacrosse ball isplaced in the pocket. In turn, this produces a large bullseye opening1350B within the pattern 1350. This bullseye opening can be configuredso that at least a portion of a lacrosse ball centers on or within, oris at least partially restrained in the bullseye opening 1350B withinthe pattern 1350. This centers the ball in the middle pocket MP4,providing a consistent location for the ball to rest within or to besnugly held within the pocket. With such a consistent resting location,which can be precisely replicated from one manufactured pocket to thenext a player can be confident that the ball will begin to roll out ofthe same location within the middle pocket onto the shooting ramp in aconsistent and reproducible manner.

Optionally, the bullseye opening 1350B is disposed within the pattern1350 at the center of the middle pocket MP4. More particularly, thebullseye opening can have a geometric center GC as shown in FIG. 48.This geometric center GC can be aligned with and coincident with an apex1355A of the middle pocket MP4. As mentioned above, the apex can beassociated with the deepest depth of the pocket, and can correspond tothe lowermost portion of a horizontally disposed lacrosse pocket whenviewed from a side profile. The precise location of the bullseye opening1350B can vary depending on the location of the apex and pocket profile.For example, where a high pocket is desired, the apex will be locatedrelatively close to the shooting strings. Thus, the bullseye openingwill likewise be located closer to the shooting strings than to the baseor ball stop of the head. Where a middle pocket is desired, the apexwill be located about midway between the shooting strings and the ballstop or base of the head. Thus, the bullseye opening will likewise belocated and generally centered about midway between the shooting stringsin the ball stop. Where a low pocket is desired, the apex will belocated closer to the ball stop or base of the head than to the shootingstrings. Thus, the bullseye opening will likewise be located closer tothe ball stop or base of the head than to the shooting strings.

As shown in FIG. 48, within the middle pocket MP4, the vertical elementsand joins can appear to emanate and project radially outward from thebullseye opening 1350B. This configuration of the verticals and joinsappearing to project radially outwardly or otherwise surround thebullseye opening 1350 can be referred to as a starburst or flowerpattern. This starburst or flower pattern can assist in orienting alacrosse ball in the pocket to settle within that particular pattern,generally centered on the bullseye opening 1350B. Again, with thisconsistent resting location of the ball within a pocket, a user cantypically manipulate the ball with the pocket and associated head moreconsistently.

Optionally, as shown in FIG. 46 the bullseye opening 1350B can bebounded by a first vertical element 1351A on a first lateral side of thepocket longitudinal axis, and a second vertical element 1351B on asecond lateral side of the pocket longitudinal axis LA opposite thefirst lateral side. The bullseye opening also can be bounded by a firstjoin 1352A and a second join 1352B. These joins can extend transverselyor generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA. These joins alsocan connect the first vertical element and the second vertical elementto one another to form the bullseye. Generally, the spacing or distancebetween the first join and the second join adjacent the bullseye openingcan be the greatest spacing or distance between joins adjacent anyopening within the lacrosse pocket 1310. Again, the bullseye opening cangenerally include the greatest open area of any opening within thelacrosse pocket.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the middle pocket MP4 can be constructed toinclude a predefined three dimensional convex shape 1355C′. This concaveshape generally extends across a side to side width SSW1 of the lacrossepocket in the middle pocket region, which width is taken perpendicularto the longitudinal axis of the pocket LA. The middle pocket MP4 asshown in FIG. 45 also can include a lengthwise predefined threedimensional concave shape 1355C″. As also illustrated in FIG. 45, thisthree dimensional concave shape can enable the pocket 1310 and inparticular the pocket body 1310B to have a predefined depth DD′. Thisdepth can range from 30 mm to 65 mm, further optionally 62.7 mm to about64.7 mm. This depth DD′ can be located and/or defined at the apex 1355Aof the pocket.

With this concavity and general three dimensional shape built into theunitary textile material, the pocket attains a concave, curved, roundedshape from side edge 1314 to side edge 1316, as well as a concave,curved, rounded shape in and adjacent the middle pocket MP4 andsometimes the shooting ramp SR. This shape is effectively knitted and/orweaved directly into the strands of the pocket. Indeed, the plurality ofstrands, and in their particular knit or weave patterns, can support thepocket 1310 in its rough three dimensional shape as, for example, shownin FIGS. 47 and 49. In those figures, the unitary textile material, isself-supported in the predefined, three dimensional shape shown there bythe network of a plurality of strands extending through the differentpatterns in that textile material. This shape approximates a final shapeafter the pocket is joined with a head, generally being stretched outand/or under tension, laterally and/or longitudinally, due to theattachment of the edges or perimeter flange to the lacrosse head.However, it is to be noted that after being produced by a knittingand/or weaving process, the pocket of this embodiment can approximatethe final three dimensional shape of the pocket when it is placed on alacrosse head.

Optionally, the middle pocket MP4 generally forms a rearward bulge orbulbous shape. As shown in FIG. 45, the apex 1355A of the middle pocketMP4 can generally be at the depth DD′ of the pocket. The apex 1355A canalso correspond to the location of the bullseye opening 1350B, and evenfurther optionally to the precise geometric center GC of the bullseyeopening. Further optionally, the middle pocket MP4 and shooting ramp SRcan be constructed with a predefined three dimensional shape. This threedimensional shape can be concave as mentioned above, howeveralternatively, it can be arcuate, parabolic, rounded or generallybulging, when taken across a width of the pocket transverse to thelongitudinal axis LA of the pocket 1310.

Due to the construction of the across pocket 1310 on an automatedassembly machine, that machine can produce a pocket having varyingoverall widths from the upper edge 1310U to the lower edge 1310L of thepocket. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 and mentioned above, the middlepocket MP4 can include a side to side width SSW1, which is a side toside lateral measurement taken perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LAof the pocket at the widest portion of the middle pocket MP4 generallyat the outermost portions of the perimeter flange 1310 PF. Near theupper edge 1310U of the pocket 1310, which is adjacent the scoop pocketportion SSP, the pocket can include a side to side with SSW2, which alsois a side to side lateral measurement taken perpendicular to thelongitudinal axis LA of the pocket at the widest portion of the pocketgenerally at the outermost portion of the perimeter flange 1310 PF nearthe scoop pocket portion. Of course, this side to side with SSW2 canalso be taken immediately adjacent the shooting strings in the pocket.The side to side with SSW2 can be at least optionally 10 mm, furtheroptionally at least 20 mm, and even further optionally at least 40 mm,yet further optionally at least 60 mm greater than the width SSW1. Dueto this difference in the lateral side to side widths of the pocketalong the longitudinal axis, the perimeter flange and/or the pocketouter when included perimeter curves outwardly in transitioning from themiddle pocket toward the scoop pocket portion of the pocket or upperedge. Thus, when viewed from above, the outer pocket perimeter orperimeter flange appears to be slightly S-shaped or slightly reverseS-shaped as it extends from the lower edge to the upper edge of thepocket. Further optionally, the outer pocket perimeter or perimeterflange can be curved, rounded, undulating, sinusoidal, or generallynonlinear as it extends from the upper edge to the lower edge. Thedegree of undulation in the perimeter flange or outer pocket perimetercan vary depending on the particular application and configuration ofthe sidewalls of the head to which the pocket is to be joined.

As mentioned above, the middle pocket MP4 can be bounded by portions ofthe shooting ramps 1341 and 1342 as shown in FIG. 46. The middle pocketalso can transition to and be integrally joined with the respectiveedges 1316 and 1314. Indeed, as mentioned above, a plurality of strandsof the middle pocket and the pattern 1350 can be interlooped and/orinterweaved with the corresponding strands of the edges 1314 and 1316 sothat the textile remains a unitary single piece. As further illustratedin FIG. 46, the edges 1314 and 1316 can extend on opposite sides of themiddle pocket MP4 and/or the shooting ramp SR from the lower edge 1310Lforward toward the upper edge 1310U of the pocket 1310.

Optionally, the side edges 1314 and 1316 can be aligned with and followin parallel the reference axes RA1 and RA2 which are generally parallelto the longitudinal axis LA of the pocket 1310. The side edges, however,can flare outward and deviate laterally away from the longitudinal axisand thus the respective reference axis RA1 and RA2 as they progresstoward the upper edge 1310U. A portion of the shooting ramp SR canremain disposed between those reference axes RA1 and RA2. The shootingramp flanks SRF1 and SRF2, however, can extend outwardly and laterallybeyond the reference axes RA1 and RA2 on opposite sides of thelongitudinal axis. Likewise, the side edges 1316 and 1314, near theupper edge 1310U can extend or flare laterally away from those referenceaxes RA1 and RA2. After being knitted or weaved on a knitting or weavingmachine, respectively, this outward flaring of the respective shootingramp flanks and edges of the pocket beyond the reference axes RA1 andRA2, the finished pocket 1310 approximates the three dimensional shapeof the pocket when installed on a lacrosse head.

Upon completion, the pocket 1310 can have a particular weight. As anexample, the pocket can weigh about 5 grams to about 50 grams, furtheroptionally about 10 grams to about 25 grams.

A method of manufacturing the lacrosse pocket of the thirteenthalternative embodiment will now be described in further detail withreference to FIGS. 43-51. As mentioned above, the lacrosse pocket isconstructed from a unitary textile material. Generally, the pocket isformed completely via a mechanized manipulation of a plurality ofstrands. The mechanized manipulation can be performed by a knitting orweaving machine 1390. Although described herein in connection with aknitting process on a knitting machine, it will be appreciated that thepocket can be weaved on a weaving machine using a weaving process. Thus,all the steps, configurations, structures and operations applied toknitting herein apply by analogy to weaving. Therefore, any descriptionof the knitting process can be applied equally to the weaving processdescription here.

The knitting process can be any of a variety of different knittingprocesses, for example circular knitting, tubular knitting, flatknitting, Jacquard knitting, Intarsia knitting, weft knitting, warpknitting and other types of knitting. When a weaving process isutilized, the process can be any one of multiple weaving processes,including processes that construct a leno weave, a twill weave, a hatchweave, a slit weave, a plain weave, a baskets weave, a Jacquard weave, aRib weave and an Oxford weave or other types of weaves.

As mentioned above, the knitting machine can be any type ofsophisticated knitting machine. Suitable knitting machines include aKauo Heng knitting machine, commercially available from Kauo HengPrecision Machinery Industrial Co. Ltd. of New Taipei City, Taiwan; aShine Star knitting machine, commercially available from Zhejiang ShineStar Machinery Co. Ltd. of Jiaxing City, China; a Stoll knitting machinefrom H. Stoll AG & Co. KG of Reutlingen, Germany, commercially availablein the U.S. from Stoll America Knitting Machinery, Inc., of New York,N.Y.; a Protti knitting machine, commercially available from ProttiS.p.A. of Asola, Italy, or other comparable knitting machines.Optionally, the knitting machine can mechanically manipulate a pluralityof strands of the unitary textile pocket and/or pocket body during aknitting process to form a predefined, three dimensional shape in thepocket 1310 and/or pocket body 1310B, for example, via a tubularknitting process in which multiple tubular elements are knitted andjoined to form the various components and structure of the pocket 1310.If desired, the tubular knitting process can also implement a weftknitting technique.

The three dimensional shape of the pocket can include a concave shapedisposed or located generally within the middle pocket MP4 and/orshooting ramp SR. The three dimensional shape also can encompasssubstantially planar and/or convex regions of the pocket, for example inthe shooting ramp and/or shooting ramp flanks, which optionally does notinclude knitted tubular elements. The machine itself can be configuredto interloop a plurality of first strands with a plurality of secondstrands, and any number of additional strands, so as to form thatpredefined, three dimensional shape in the pocket and/or pocket body.The machine also can mechanically manipulate other strands, oroptionally the same strands, but different portions thereof, of theunitary textile material with a knitting machine during the knittingprocess to form the above mentioned predefined generally flat planarshapes in the pocket body and/or predefined three dimensional convexshapes in the pocket body. The latter shapes can correspond generallywith the shooting ramp flanks SRF1, SRF2 and/or the respective edges1310U, 1310L, 1314 and/or 1316 or other portions of the pocket.

During the knitting process, the knitting machine knits a unitarytextile pocket and body so as to form the respective components of thepocket and pocket body. For example, the knitting machine knits theupper edge, the first and second sidewall edges, the lower edge, theshooting ramp, the middle pocket and the shooting ramp flanks which havetheir respective predefined shapes and patterns. All of these differentknitted components of the pocket body are contiguous and continuous withone another, being formed from the plurality of strands that make up theunitary textile material. Indeed, many of the individual strands canspan the length of the pocket from the upper edge 1310U to the loweredge 1310L and can be interlooped in specific regions of the pocket,thereby forming and becoming integrated with the different knit patternsof the pocket. Thus, as one example, a knitting machine can interloop afirst strand with a second strand near the lower edge 1310L. The firststrand can continue into a vertical element through the middle pocketand shooting ramp SR. In the shooting ramp SR, that strand can beinterlooped with additional strands within the knit pattern 1350. Thesame strand can extend into and be interlooped with yet other strands inthe knit pattern 1318. The same strand can extend along and beinterlooped with yet additional or similar strands in the pattern 1319.The strand can extend and be further interlooped with yet other strandsin the upper edge 1310U of the lacrosse pocket.

As mentioned above, the knitting during the knitting process knits theunitary textile body so that it forms in that body the shooting ramp SR,middle pocket MP4, respective shooting ramp flanks SRF1 and SRF2 as wellas the different components of the pocket in the zones A-E as shown inFIG. 43. It does all this in a mechanized manner, without direct manual,human manipulation of any strands in the pocket.

The unitary textile material of the pocket 1310 and/or pocket body1310B, and in particular its multiple strands, can be mechanicallymanipulated to provide different knit patterns. During the knittingprocess, the knitting machine 1390 effectively knits a plurality ofstrands individually and/or collectively so as to form the differentregions of the pocket, for example, the first knit region 1318, thesecond knit region 1319, the runners 1341, 1342, the edges 13U, 1310L,1314 and/or 1316, as well as the region 1350 in which the middle pocketMP4 and the portion of the shooting ramp SR are disposed. Optionally, amajority of the middle pocket region MP4 can be weft knitted, and caninclude multiple tubular elements, such as tubular vertical elements asdescribed above. The knitting machine creates all of these differentcomponents and patterns in a mechanized process using multiple needlesthrough which the thread is dispensed and included in the pocket body.Effectively, the plurality of strands are put in place via mechanicalmanipulation of the respective needles of the knitting machine, withinthe pocket body. None of the strands are subject to direct manual humanmanipulation to form the pocket body, let alone any of its threedimensional shapes or components.

As shown in FIG. 51, the knitting machine 1390 can be configured toreceive multiple different strands 1393A, 1393B and 1393C that arespooled on respective cones 1394A, 1394B and 1394C as shown in FIG. 51.The different cones, also referred to as spools herein, and differentstrands can be constructed from different materials as further explainedbelow, depending on the particular attributes and mechanical and/orphysical properties of the pocket in certain regions. The respectivecones 1394A, 1394B, 1394C each can be rotatably mounted on an axis sothat the knitting machine 1390 can draw in stands of the material fromthe respective cones.

Optionally, the knitting or weaving machine can include 200-1,200needles, further optionally about 400-1,000 needles, even furtheroptionally about 500-800 needles. These needles can be manipulated andcontrolled by actuating mechanisms further controlled by a controller.The controller can have preprogrammed knitting or weaving patterns inmemory. A user can select and/or program the controller so that itdirects the actuating mechanisms and thus the respective independentneedles to knit and/or weave the strands in a particular pattern and/orwithin a particular region.

Throughout the knitting process, the knitting machine knits differentregions and different patterns. As mentioned above, it can knit thefirst pattern 1318, the second pattern 1319 forming the tubularstructure therein, as well as the runners 1341 and 1342 as well as thepattern 1350 near the middle pocket. In constructing the differentpatterns, the knitting machine can change the density, that is thenumber of strands, courses and/or wales in a given region as well as indifferent regions of the pocket. For example, the knitting machine canmanipulate the strands so that the density of strands in the perimeterflange 1310PF is greater than the density in the first pattern 1318. Thedensity of strands in the third pattern 1319 can likewise be greaterthan the density in the pattern 1318. The runners 1341 and 1342 can havea strand density that is greater than the region 1318 but perhapssimilar to the density in the edges and/or vertical elements of themiddle pocket and/or shooting ramp. With these different densities, someregions of the pocket can be more or less densely knitted than otherregions. This can provide desired mechanical and/or physical propertiesof the pocket in those specific regions, and/or across the pocket. Forexample, where it is more densely knitted, the pocket can be more robustand rigid. Where it is less dense, the pocket can be more supple.Optionally, however, these characteristics of suppleness and rigiditycan be altered when the pocket is connected to a head. In some cases,the pocket can be stretched more in certain regions than in others,which can either increase or decrease the rigidity and/or suppleness ofthe pocket in the different regions and within the different knitpatterns.

The pocket and pocket body can include different components and regionsthat are constructed from strands of different materials havingdifferent properties. To create such a pocket, the knitting machine 1390can be set up so that the different spools 1394A, 1394B and 1394Cinclude appropriate amounts of continuous, elongated strands of a firstmaterial and a different second material. In some cases, the firstmaterial 1393A can be less elastic and more abrasion resistant anddurable than the second material 1393B and 1393C. Of course, thedifferent materials can be constructed so that they have other differentmechanical and/or elastic properties. As an example, a strand of a firstmaterial, for example an elongated aromatic polyamide can be placed onthe first spool 1394A. Strands of a second material, for examplethermoplastic polymer can be placed on spools 1394B and 1394C. Theknitting machine 1390 can pull strands 1393A from the first cone orspool 1394A and construct at least one of the sidewall edges 1314, 1316,the upper edge 1310U and/or lower edge 1310L of the first pocket body1310B with this plurality of strands. The knitting machine 1390 canseparately pull the strands 13938 and 1393C of the second material offthe cones or spools 1394B and 1394C, respectively, and interloop certainones of those strands with the strand 1393A. Thus, the strands incertain regions can be of one material, and can be interloped andconnected directly with strands of the second material in predefinedlocations.

Optionally, the knitting machine, or any automated pocket assemblymachine described herein, can be configured to mechanically manipulate astrand drawn or pulled from a particular spool to form a predefinedthree-dimensional shape in a first unitary textile lacrosse pocket body.This first strand can be constructed from the second material, forexample a thermoplastic polymer. The machine also can make a secondlacrosse pocket body joined with the first lacrosse pocket body, whereboth the first and second lacrosse pocket bodies are constructedprimarily from the strand of the second material. If desired, themachine can be coupled to spools of other types of elongated strandssuch as those constructed from the first material, for example anelongated aromatic polyamide strand. The automated machine also caninterloop or otherwise join one or more strand of the first materialwith one or more strand of the second material.

All the strands 1393B and 1393C can be used to form the patterns 1318and 1319, as well as the pattern 1350, including the middle pocket MP4and a portion of the shooting ramp SR. The strands of the firstmaterial, however, as mentioned above, can be used to manufacture therespective edges around those components. Where the edges, constructedfrom the plurality of strands 1393A of the first material interfaces ortransitions to the other components such as the second pattern 1318,third pattern 1319 or pattern 1350, the strands 1393A of the firstmaterial can be interloped and interlaced directly with the knittedstrands 1394B, 1394C of the adjacent region of the second material. Toachieve this, different needles of the machine can feed and interloopthe different materials in the respective different locations. After alacrosse pocket 1310 is knitted and completed by the knitting machine1390, it can be removed from the knitting machine and later joined witha lacrosse head in a desired manner as described herein.

Where the pocket 1310 includes one or more tubular structures, such astubular members in the location of shooting strings, an additional largediameter lace, web or thong can be placed through the tubular structureand joined with the pocket and/or an associated lacrosse head. Where therunners 1341 and 1342 optionally include a tubular structure (not shown)knitted in a similar fashion to the tubular structures 1319C above,elongated runner elements constructed from polymers, rubber or othersynthetic materials can be placed in those tubes of the runners tofurther accentuate and raise the runners relative to the shooting rampSR.

Optionally, the machine 1390, whether a knitting or weaving machine, canbe programmed or otherwise controlled so as to generate a strip oflacrosse pockets including first, second, third and more completelacrosse pockets, each knitted, weaved or otherwise constructed in amanner similar to that described above. As an example, with reference toFIG. 51, the machine 1390 can knit a first pocket 1310, second pocket1310′ and third pocket 1310″, or any other number of pockets. Thesepockets can all be disposed on a pocket strip 1390S that exits themachine 1390. These pockets can be joined end for end to one anotheralong the strip 1390S. For example, the first pocket 1310 can be joinedat its lower edge 1310L with an upper edge 1310U′ of a second pocket1310′. These edges can be joined together at an edge interface 1360.This edge interface 1360 can be a relatively long structure,approximately 1-6 inches in length, or it can be a single strand thatconnects the lower edge 1310L directly to the upper edge 1310U′.Optionally, the edge interface 1360 can comprise a knit pattern that isdifferent from the patterns of the respective pockets. Of course, thepatterns can be changed to be similar to those of the respective pocketsif desired within the edge interface as well.

Further optionally, the knitting or weaving machine, or other automatedpocket assembly machine, can be controlled by the controller to producethe strip of pockets. The controller can be any conventional processor,computer or other computing device. The controller can be electricallycoupled to the machine, and can be in communication with a memory, adata storage module, a network, a server, or other construct that canstore and/or transfer data. That data can be particular type of datarelated to lacrosse pockets. For example, the data can be first lacrossepocket data pertaining to one or more particular knitting patterns,weaving patterns or other patterns associated with and/or incorporatedinto the lacrosse pocket. The lacrosse pocket data can be implemented,accessed and/or utilized by the machine, in the form of a code, programand/or other directive. The lacrosse pocket data, when utilized to formthe pocket with the assembly machine, ultimately can generate in thepocket features such as: the predefined three-dimensional shape; theposition, dimension and/or depth of a middle pocket; the position of anapex of the pocket; the length and location of an outer pocketperimeter; the position and dimension of various edges of the pocket;the position and dimension of a shooting ramp, also referred to as aball channel; the position and dimension the runners and/or shootingstrings of the pocket; the side to side lateral width of the pocket; theminimum width of the pocket; the side to side curvature of the middlepocket and the like.

The controller and/or the automated assembly machine can access thelacrosse pocket data to thereby control the assembly machine and producea strip of lacrosse pockets in a desired number and configuration. Eachof the lacrosse pockets can include a substantially identical predefinedthree-dimensional shape, and can have virtually identical physicalfeatures, such as those enumerated above in connection with the lacrossepocket data. Alternatively, where the machine is set up to produce onlya single lacrosse pocket, the machine can be controlled by thecontroller, which can utilize the first lacrosse pocket data to producea lacrosse pocket having features that correspond to the first lacrossepocket data.

When producing a strip 1390S of lacrosse pockets, the individuallacrosse pockets can be separated from one another in a variety ofmanners. In one example, the respective edges, for example, 1310L and1310U′ can be joined with the edge interface 1360 in the form of asingle pull stitch or strand. This pull stitch can be pulled by amachine or a human operator so that the respective edges separate fromone another and/or the edge interface, thereby allowing the pocket 1310′to be removed from or dissociated from the pocket 1310. Likewise, theedge 1310L can include one or more pull strands that can be pulled via amachine or human operator to separate the lower edge from the edgeinterface.

In some cases, where the lower edge 1310L of one pocket is joineddirectly with the upper edge 1310U′ of another pocket, a pull strand atthe edge interface 1360 can be pulled to separate the second pocket1310′ from the first pocket 1310.

Another manner of separating the pockets from the strip can include theuse of a decoupling element 1391. This decoupling element 1391 candecouple one pocket from the next, optionally at the edge interface orrespective edges of the pockets. As shown in FIG. 51, the decouplingdevice 1391 can include shears or hot melt tongs that close across thelower edge 1310L′ of the pocket 1310′. In so doing, those shears cut,melt or burn off the next adjacent or third lacrosse pocket 1310″. Thedecoupling element 1391 can make multiple cuts, one adjacent the upperedge 1310U″ of the third pocket 1310″ and/or adjacent the lower edge1310L′ of the second pocket 1310′. Optionally, the decoupling elementcan be a laser cutting device or a die cutting mechanism. In cases wherethe edge interface element is only a strand or a couple strands wide,the decoupler can cut or hot melt across this edge interface, therebyseparating the respective edges of the third and second pockets. Fromthere, the pockets can be dropped into a bin or other container forfurther processing on an individual basis. Optionally, a continuousstrip of multiple pockets can be rolled on a spool and delivered to amanufacturer who can then mechanically or manually disassociate theindividual pockets from the pocket strip 1390S.

Upon the decoupling of the individual lacrosse pockets and/or lacrossepocket bodies, each of the lacrosse pockets generally retain theirpredefined three dimensional shapes. For example, even upon decoupling,the individual pockets will retain the concavity of the concave shapeand/or contour of the middle pocket and shooting ramp. Likewise, theshooting ramp flanks can maintain a generally planar and/or convex threedimensional configuration.

The method of making the lacrosse pocket 1310 of the thirteenthalternative embodiment in strip form can also generate a lacrosse pocketstrip 1390S having varying widths. For example, as shown in FIG. 51, themachine 1390, can vary the widths of the pocket strip 1390S and/orindividual pockets of the strip. For example, the machine 1390 canmechanically manipulate strands to generate pockets along the strip thathave a width at their outermost lateral boundaries of SW1. This isgenerally the maximum width of the strip 1390S, along its length. Thismaximum width can correspond to the region of the pocket adjacentshooting strings and are close to the scoop. It also can be the maximumof width of any individual pocket that is formed along the strip. Themachine 1390 also can mechanically manipulate the strands and theoverall width of the strip so that the lacrosse pocket strip 1390Sincludes a second width SW2, which is less than the first width SW1. Thesecond width SW2 can correspond generally to the region of the pocketnear the middle pocket MP4 and/or rearward thereof. This width SW2 canbe approximately half to three-quarters the maximum width SW1. Byprecisely knitting the strip 1390S in the respective pockets therein,minimal waste is generated from the process. This is true even where theindividual pockets and strip width varies. Without the knitting and/orweaving machine 1390, the material between the maximum width SW1 and thesmaller width SW2 would otherwise be removed and discarded as waste.Further, to remove this material would typically require additionalmachinery and/or human intervention or manipulation.

Optionally, the machine 1390 can mechanically manipulate the strands ofeach lacrosse pocket constructed on it so that an outer lateralperimeter along the strip of pockets undulates toward and away fromlongitudinal axis of the strip. Referring to FIG. 51, the strip 1390Sincludes a strip longitudinal axis SLA. The first pocket 1310 includes afirst pocket perimeter flange, also referred to as a pocket edge orperimeter 1310PF disposed laterally of the strip longitudinal axis SLA.The second pocket 1310′ includes a second pocket perimeter flange1310PF′. Each of the respective first and second pocket perimeterflanges 1310PF and 1310PF′ can undulate toward and away from the striplongitudinal axis SLA along the length of the strip. For example, nearthe upper edge 1310U and or a shooting ramp flank SRF2 of the firstpocket 1310, the perimeter flange 1310PF can be a distance D7 from thestrip longitudinal axis SLA. Near the middle pocket MP4, the perimeterflange 1310PF, can be a distance D8 from the strip longitudinal axisSLA. This distance D8 can be less than the distance D7. Optionally, thedistance D8 can be about ¾, ½, ¼ or some other proportion of thedistance D7. Further, in transitioning from the different distances D7to D8 from the strip longitudinal axis SLA, the perimeter flange orpocket edge can transition smoothly along a nonlinear, curved and/orrounded transition area 1310TA. This transition area 1310TA can mimic orfollow the curvature of sidewalls of a particular lacrosse head asdesired.

After the lacrosse pocket of the thirteenth alternative embodiment 1310is constructed, it can be joined with a lacrosse head 20 as shown inFIG. 44. The lacrosse pocket 1310 can be joined in a variety ofdifferent manners. For example, the respective edges 1310L, 1310U, 1314and 1316 can each be configured to and include a plurality of laceholes. A large diameter lace (greater than 2.0 mm) can be fitted throughthose respective holes. This lace can then be tied directly torespective sidewalls 24, 26, ball stop 23 or base 22 and scoop 28 of alacrosse head 20. In particular, the respective side edges 1314 and 1316can be connected to respective sidewalls 24 and 26. Likewise, the loweredge 1310L can be joined with the ball stop and/or base 23, 22. Theupper edge 1310U can be joined directly with the scoop 28 using thelarge diameter (greater than 2.0 mm and/or greater than 3.0 mm) laces.The lacing can be performed manually by human.

Optionally, this connection can be achieved via a computer guided robotwith a computer guided lace needle that installs the large diameter lacethrough the pocket holes 27H of the head and corresponding holes definedand integrally knitted into the edges of the pocket. During theconnection of the lacrosse pocket to the head, the lacrosse pocket canundergo a certain amount of stretch in the lateral and longitudinaldirections. This, in turn, can add tautness and rigidity to therespective zones as described above in connection with FIG. 43. Duringthe connection, however, the general three dimensional shapes of therespective components as described above are retained, and in some casesaugmented via the connection of the pocket to the lacrosse head. Forexample, the middle pocket MP4 and portions of the shooting ramp SRretain the three dimensional concave shapes. The respective shootingramp flanks SRF1 and SRF2 also can be configured so that they retaintheir generally convex and/or planar three dimensional configurations.

While the pocket 1310 constructed from a unitary textile material can bejoined directly with a lacrosse head 20 using laces, that pocketoptionally can be integrally formed with the lacrosse head via a moldingprocess. On a high level, the edges of the lacrosse pocket are placed ina mold that is in the shape of the desired lacrosse head. The materialfrom which the lacrosse head is constructed, for example, thermoplasticpolymers, such as nylon or other suitable material, is injected into themold cavity. Upon such injection, the injected material engages,encapsulates and becomes embedded within the edges of the unitarytextile material and the pocket in general. The material is allowed tocure and the lacrosse head is removed from the mold, with the lacrossepocket being integrally molded and embedded within the components of thelacrosse head. With this particular construction, the lacrosse head andassociated lacrosse pocket can be precisely reproducible. In turn,consumers of this integral, combined lacrosse head and lacrosse pocketcan experience a virtually identical mechanical performance and feelfrom one head to the next, upon initial use of the same. With thiscombination as well, there is no separate manual stringing of the head,which can lead to inconsistency and undesirable break-in periods for thepocket to achieve a desired shape and profile. With the currentembodiments, that desired profile can be included in the pocket so thatthe head performs as desired by the user.

In addition, a plurality of different profiled pockets can be moldedinto one head or multiple heads. In turn, a user can experiment withthose different pocket profiles and/or heads, and select the one thatbest suits their preferences. In addition, if a user has a particularprofile preference, that profile of a particular lacrosse pocket can bestored in a database. When the user wears out their first head andpocket, they can go and request another pocket and head, identical tothe first pocket and head are produced again. Thus, the player can startagain with virtually the same pocket and associated feel as they hadwith the previous pocket and head. This can enhance the confidence ofthe player. Also, the player need not go through extensive break-inperiods to make the pocket perform as desired. Instead, upon purchase ofthe new head and pocket combination, the pocket will consistentlyperform as expected.

Referring to FIGS. 45A, 45B and 45C, a lacrosse pocket 1310/lacrossebody 1310B is placed adjacent a mold 1380. The mold 1380 can includemultiple mold portions 1380A, 1380B and 1380C. As shown in FIG. 45B and45C, the mold portions 1380A and 1380B can generally be first and secondlaterally moving mold slides that assist in completing cavities asdescribed further below. The mold portion 1380C, as shown in FIG. 45Ccan be a central stationary mold portion. This central mold portion caninclude an upper surface 1380CBS that is configured to directly engagean inner surface of the lacrosse pocket 1310 when the pocket is readiedfor molding. As can be seen, the surface 1380CBS can be in the shape ofa convex, upwardly extending bulge. This bulging mold surface can beshaped three-dimensionally to mimic the desired or intended roundness,three-dimensional contour, and/or apex of the finished pocket. Thebulging mold surface also can be shaped three dimensionally to mimic thelongitudinal and lateral curvatures and angles of the shooting ramp SR.Further, the bulging mold surface can mimic the convex and/or planarshapes of respective shooting flanks adjacent the shooting ramp and/orball channel of the pocket. Because the pocket is already speciallyconstructed to include a concave, three-dimensional contour and othergeometric features, the pocket readily conforms to and lays over thebulging mold surface 1380CBS.

Referring to FIG. 45B, the mold 1380 can define a mold cavity 1380FCthat is configured to mirror the sidewalls 24, 26, scoop 28, base 22and/or ball stop 23 of the lacrosse head 20, for example, shown in FIGS.44. In particular, the mold cavity 1380FC can comprise multipledifferent cavities to make different portions of a lacrosse head. Forexample, the mold cavity 1380FC can include a scoop mold cavity 1380SC,one or more sidewall mold cavities 1380SW, a base mold cavity 1380BAand/or a throat cavity 1380T. These different cavities are configured toform the respective scoop, sidewalls, base and/or throat depending onthe particular construction of the lacrosse head. With the exception ofthe perimeter flange 1310 PF and any optional long locator pins 1380P,shown in FIG. 45C, these cavities, that is, the scoop mold cavity,sidewall mold cavity and base mold cavity, can be substantially empty orvoid of other structures before the introduction of molten materialwithin those cavities. Of course, if it is desired to insert moldreinforcement elements, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No.7,749,113 to Morrow or U.S. Pat. No. 8,282,512 to Winningham, both ofwhich are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety, then thoseelements can be placed in the respective cavities before the moldingoperation.

The lacrosse pocket 1310 can be placed so that its edges 1310U, 1316,1310L, 1314 and 1316, which can be joined with one another in acontinuous manner optionally to form the perimeter flange 1310 PF, aredisposed at least partially within the cavity 1380FC of the mold 1380.In particular, the upper edge 1310U can be placed in the scoop moldcavity 1380SC, the sidewall edges 1314, 1316 can be placed in thesidewall mold cavities 1380SW, and the lower edge 1310L can be placed inthe base mold cavity 1380BA. These edges and the perimeter flange canextend in a continuous manner through each of the respective cavities,so that the perimeter flange and associated edge or edges effectivelycircumferentiates and/or surrounds the entire pocket 1310. Further, allof the respective different edges of the perimeter flange, and thepocket outer perimeter in general can be simultaneously disposed withineach of the scoop mold cavity, the sidewall mold cavities and the basemold cavity. The perimeter flange and the pocket outer perimeter canextend continuously within the sidewall mold cavities from a first endthereof near the base, to a second end thereof near the scoop. Theperimeter flange and the pocket outer perimeter can extend continuouslywithin the base mold cavity from a first end adjacent the first sidewallto a second end adjacent the opposite second sidewall. The perimeterflange and pocket outer perimeter also can extend continuously withinthe scoop mold cavity from a first end adjacent the first sidewall to asecond end adjacent an opposite second sidewall.

Optionally, the edges and/or perimeter flange can be secured in therespective mold cavities during a molding operation using optionallocator pins 1380P, which are shown in FIG. 45C. These locator pins canbe movably disposed within locator pin slots 1380PS. The locator pinscan be movable so that they can be removed from the respectivesidewalls, scoop and/or base after formation of those components of thelacrosse head. Upon their removal, the lacrosse head can be releasedmore easily from the mold 1380. In cases where the lacrosse head afterformation is relatively flexible, the pins can be constructed so theyare not movable. In which case, the head can be removed with someadditional force, flexing or give to expand and allow the head to popoff the locator pins and the remainder of the mold.

As shown, the locator pins 1380P can be in the form of small cylindricalpins. The pins can be of a length sufficient to extend into therespective cavities. For example, the pins can extend into the sidewallmold cavity 1380SW a sufficient distance to enable the perimeter flange1310PF or edge to be placed or secured to those pens, thereby suspendingthe perimeter flange sufficiently within the sidewall mold cavity, sothat when the sidewall components are molded, the perimeter flange iswell anchored within the resulting, cured lacrosse head. The pins alsocan be sized so that they fit through respective optional locator pinopenings 1310LPO that are defined within the perimeter flange 1310 PFand/or respective edges of the lacrosse pocket 1310, 1310B, constructedby the automated pocket assembly machine. These locator pin openings canbe the result of a particular knit or weave pattern of the pocket wherethe textile is interrupted to form those openings. If desired, thelocator pin openings can be located only within the perimeter flangeand/or edges of the pocket. Of course, they can be located elsewheredepending on the particular attachment points of the pocket to the moldas desired during the molding process.

The optional locator pins 1380P can be constructed so as to hold theperimeter flange 1310PF, or generally an edge or perimeter of the pocketbody, a preselected distance D9 within the respective sidewall moldcavities 1380SW, scoop mold cavity 1380SC and/or base mold cavity1380BA. This preselected distance D9 can be at least about 1.0 mm,further optionally about 2.0 mm, even further optionally 2.5 mm, or yetfurther optionally 3.0 mm or more, depending on the particularapplication and desired anchor strength. The locator pins and moldcavities also can be constructed so that a perimeter flange firstsurface 1310FS faces generally toward the pocket longitudinal axis LAwhen the perimeter flange is secured within the mold cavity.Accordingly, a perimeter flange second surface 1310SS faces generallyaway from the pocket longitudinal axis LA. Although FIG. 45C shows theperimeter flange first surface 1310FS and second surface 1310SS beinggenerally vertical, or parallel to and interior cavity surface 1380CS,it is contemplated that the surfaces can be offset at an angle C ofabout 1° to about 45° or more relative to that cavity surface. Otherangles can be selected depending on the textile material for which thepocket is constructed, the ease of embedding and/or encapsulating thepocket material with molten material, the cavity configuration and/orthe desired anchor strength. Further optionally, the perimeter flangecan be folded over toward and/or upon itself, or partially bent in aV-shape or U-shape within the respective mold cavities. This can beaccomplished with more specialized locator pins and/or locator pinopenings.

Optionally, the mold 1380 can include mechanisms different from thelocator pins shown in FIG. 45C to properly position the perimeter flangewithin the mold cavity. For example, the mold cavity can include clampsthat clamp the pocket immediately adjacent the perimeter flange or someother portion of the pocket. These clamps can hold the pocket, and inparticular the perimeter flange, within the respective cavities. Themold portions themselves can in some cases act as clamps when closed,holding the perimeter flange within the respective mold cavities. Asanother example, the perimeter flange can include an adhesive thatsecures the perimeter flange to a desired surface within the respectivemold cavities.

Optionally, the mold can include different mechanisms to move thelocator pins and/or eject a molded lacrosse head. For example, as shownin FIGS. 45D and 45E, the mold portion 1380C′ can be bisected intocorresponding left and right portions 1380C1′ and 1380C2′. Each of theseportions can include locator pins 1380P″, which are oriented to hold theperimeter flange 1380PF′ during the molding process. The mold portions1380C1′ and 1380C2′ are movable in the direction of the arrows Kselecting toward and away from one another. The pins 1380P′ can beimmovable relative to the mold portions. When the mold portions move indirection K toward one another after the molding process, the pins1380P′ withdraw from the formed sidewalls 124 and 126. Thus the curedhead can be easily removed from the mold. Further optionally, the moldcan be outfitted with ejectors 1380ES′. These ejectors can push on thescoop of the head after it is formed to assist in popping the completedlacrosse head and pocket off the mold. Of course, these ejectors can beconfigured to engage other parts of the head and/or pocket to assist inthe ejection from the mold.

As shown in FIG. 45C, the perimeter flange 1310PF can be held apreselected distance D10 away from the outwardly facing cavity surface1380CS. The perimeter flange also can be held a similar or differentdistance away from an opposing cavity surface on the opposite side ofthe cavity. The distance D10 can be selected so that the perimeterflange 1310PF is not visible through the respective overmoldedcomponents of the lacrosse head. For example, the distance D10 can beoptionally at least 1.0 mm, further optionally at least 2.0 mm, evenfurther optionally at least 4 mm, and even further optionally at least 5mm. The distance D10 from which the respective perimeter flange, firstand second surfaces are held from adjacent cavity surfaces can alsovary. For example, the first surface 1310FS can be held 2 mm from thecavity surface 1380CS, while the second surface 1310SS can be held 3 mmfrom an opposing cavity surface. Other distances can be selecteddepending on the particular application.

Further optionally, the locator pins 1380P and/or convex bulging surface1380CBS can be used individually or in combination to apply a tension Tshown in FIG. 45C to the pocket 1310. For example, when the perimeterflange 1310PF is joined with the locator pins 1380P, the main body 1310Bof the pocket 1310 can stretch, thereby acquiring a tension T within itin the stretched state. This tension T can be exerted in the pocket sothat when the components of the lacrosse head are joined with aperimeter flange and the lacrosse pocket in general, the pocketmaintains a desired tension, or some degree of that desired tension,thereby retaining its intended contoured three-dimensional shape. Ofcourse, in some embodiments, it may not be desired to include a tensionin the pocket during the molding process. In such cases, the concavebulging surface can be reduced in size, or the pocket can be sizedlarger so that the pocket does not stretch under tension in a portion ofthe mold.

Even further optionally, the tension T applied to the lacrosse pocketcan vary across the pocket. As an example, tension can be applied to afirst portion of lacrosse pocket while at least partially maintainingthe predefined three-dimensional concave shape in a second portion ofthe lacrosse pocket so that the entire lacrosse pocket does not becomeentirely planar. One example of this is illustrated in FIG. 45B. There,the pocket can be under a first tension T in the location of the middlepocket MP4. The pocket can also be under a second, different tension T2near the scoop, shooting strings or upper edge 1310U of the pocket. Thattension T2 can be greater than the tension T. In such a case, thetension T2 can form the pocket near the upper edge, scoop and/orshooting strings in a more planar or convex configuration than theremainder of the pocket. Likewise the relatively lower tension T in themiddle pocket portion MP4 does not unduly distort or modify thethree-dimensional concave contour of the pocket in that region, nor theassociated lateral and longitudinal curvature.

As shown in FIGS. 45A, 45B and 45C, during the mold process, a material1380M, optionally in a molten, fluid and/or liquid state, is injectedunder pressure into the mold cavity 1380FV, also referred to as a headframe cavity. Of course, molding techniques other than injection moldingcan be used, such as pour molding or casting. The molten materialpermeates throughout the cavity and fills each of its componentcavities, for example the scoop mold cavity, the base mold cavity andthe sidewall mold cavities. As it flows through these cavities, thematerial also comes into intimate contact with respective edges of thepocket, and/or the perimeter flange that are disposed within the moldcavity 1380FC, and optionally simultaneously disposed in the differentcomponent cavities. As mentioned above, one or more of these edgesand/or the perimeter flange can form the outer perimeter of the pocket.If desired, all of the edges can collectively form a continuousperimeter flange or outer perimeter 1310PF that extends around thelacrosse pocket body. The perimeter flange optionally can be at least2.0 mm, or at least 2.5 mm wide or wider. The perimeter flange 1310PFcan be the portion of the lacrosse pocket 1310 that is over molded by atleast a portion of the lacrosse head in joining the lacrosse pocket 1310to the lacrosse head 20. Where the perimeter flange is at least thewidth mentioned above, it has been discovered that there is enoughstructure of the pocket to satisfactorily embed and securely join thepocket body with the portion of the head into which the perimeter flangeis molded. With widths of the perimeter flange that are significantlyless than those mentioned above, it is possible that without extrareinforcement or the use of special materials, the perimeter flange andpocket can rip or tear out from the overmolded polymeric material fromwhich the head is constructed. This can be due to not enough pocketbeing satisfactorily anchored within the overmolded head material.

When the material contacts the respective edges and/or generally theperimeter flange disposed in the cavity 1380FC, the material, optionallyunder pressure, encapsulates the individual strands, coating theirsurfaces on front and back. The material also can extend from a front orfirst surface 1310FS of the perimeter flange that faces generally towardthe pocket longitudinal axis LA, to a second surface 1310SS or outsideof the perimeter flange that faces generally away from the pocketlongitudinal axis. In many cases, the material also permeates throughsmall spaces between the individual strands, connecting the injectedmaterial from one side of the flange or edge to the other. This, inturn, embeds the material within the edges and/or perimeter flange.Where the strands are knitted within the perimeter flange, those strandsare typically interlooped with one another, or a single strand isinterlooped with itself, in multiple columns. In these cases, the strandor strands form one or more loops in the perimeter flange. The molten orliquid material can permeate through and/or flow through the openings atthe interlooped portions of the strand(s), in some cases impregnatingthe strands and/or spaces between the strands with the material in theperimeter flange. Optionally, the pocket is placed within the mold sothat the molten material or liquid material is prevented from enteringopenings adjacent the perimeter flange, for example openings 1353O inFIG. 45A. This can be accomplished simply by not positioning thoseopenings within the respective mold cavities. Accordingly, these largeropenings, which can contribute to the functionality of the middle pocketor other components of the pocket, are not filled with the molten orliquid material.

As shown in FIG. 45A, after the injected material cures to form thesidewall portion 26, it embeds within and extends through the openings1316O of the portion of the edge that was within the mold. Again, theseopenings can be formed between adjacent interweaved strands, or betweenloops formed from one or more continuous strands in a knit pattern. Thematerial also can encapsulate one or more of the plurality of individualstrands 1316S, surrounding or circumferentiating each substantiallyentirely so that all outer surfaces of the strand are within the moltenmaterial. With the above embedding, the edge 1360 is sufficientlytrapped and molded within the sidewall to hold it in place under therigors of use during a lacrosse activity.

As mentioned above, all or a portion of the respective edges and/orperimeter flange can be constructed from a first material, such as anaromatic polyamide and/or an ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene.These strands of this first material can be included in a first portion1316P1 of the edge 1316. The edge 1316 can also include a second portion1316P2, which can be constructed from a plurality of strands constructedfrom a second material, such as a thermoplastic polymer, or some othermaterial different from the first material. This second portion 1316P2can be joined with the pattern 1350, which is also constructed from aplurality of strands of the second material. Within the edge, more ofthe plurality of the strands constructed from the first material areembedded and encapsulated or otherwise over molded by the portion of thelacrosse head, for example, the sidewalls, scoop and/or base or ballstop.

Optionally, only the portion of the edges and the pocket constructedfrom the first material can be embedded in and encapsulated by therespective lacrosse head portion. If desired, a majority of theplurality of first strands incorporated into the lacrosse pocket can beembedded within the lacrosse head. Similarly, a minority of theplurality of strands constructed from the second material can be freefrom, and generally not encapsulated by or embedded within the portionsof the lacrosse head. Further optionally, either a majority (greaterthan 50%) or a minority (less than 50%) of the width of the edge orperimeter can be embedded within the lacrosse head.

Further optionally, with the embedding of the edge 1316 and/or otherportions of a perimeter flange 1310PF, such as the opposing side edgeand/or upper or lower edges, the majority of that edge or perimeterflange is concealed within the lacrosse head and not visible to a user.In some cases, the respective first and second materials can be sodisposed in the edge that when the edge is placed within the mold 1380,the first material and associated knit structure is placed within themold cavity, but the second material and associated second knit patternis not placed in the mold cavity 1380FC. Further, one particular knitpattern or knit structure of the edge may be placed within the moldcavity, but a second knit pattern of the edge, or some other componentsuch as the middle pocket, shooting ramp and/or shooting ramp flanks, isnot disposed in the mold cavity. Even further optionally, more of aplurality of the first strands than the plurality of second strands canbe placed in the mold 1380 and in particular the mold cavity 1380FCduring the molding steps.

Yet further optionally, the thickness T6 of head material disposed overthe perimeter flange can be varied to provide different aestheticeffects, as shown in FIG. 45A. As an example, where it is desired toshow a consumer that the perimeter flange is indeed embedded andencapsulated within the lacrosse head material, the thickness T6 of themolten and cured head material over the perimeter flange can be reducedto 0.1 mm to less than 0.7 mm, or some others thickness sufficient toallow the perimeter flange to visually show through the surrounding headmaterial, generally in a somewhat translucent manner. On the other hand,in some cases the perimeter flange can be concealed within the materialfrom which the head is constructed. In this case, the thickness T6 ofthe head material over the perimeter flange can be at least 0.5 mm,optionally 1.5 mm to 4.5 mm, and further optionally greater than 6 mm,on both the front and back sides of the perimeter flange. Sometimes, thethickness of the head material disposed over the perimeter flange candiffer on the front and back sides thereof. As an example, in the scoop,the head material on the front, facing the interior of the pocket, canbe of a thickness that is less than the thickness of the same hadmaterial on the back side of the perimeter flange. This can provideenhanced abrasion resistance on the back side and/or can provide asmoother transition from the pocket to the scoop when a lacrosse ballexits the head.

The width SW3 of the edge 1360 can be precisely selected so that thefirst portion 1316P1 of the edge 1316 is over molded and encapsulated byor embedded within the portion of the lacrosse head. The width SW3 alsocan be selected so that a small portion 1316P2 extends downwardly fromthe portion of the molded over lacrosse head and connects to theremainder of the lacrosse pocket 1310. In other constructions, the edgesor in general the perimeter flange can be constructed in such a mannerthat a major portion (more than half) of the width SW3 of the edge orperimeter flange is embedded within the material from which the lacrossehead is constructed. In yet other constructions, the edges, or ingeneral the perimeter flange can be constructed in such a manner so thata minor portion (half or less) of the width SW3 of the edge or perimeterflange is embedded within the material. Optionally, where the perimeterflange is constructed from a material such as a polyamide or other lesselastic material, it can be yellow, having a wavelength of 570 nm to 590nm. Further, this yellow material can project downward from the bottomof the scoop, sidewalls and/or base of the cured lacrosse head apreselected distance. With the material projecting from the bottom ofthe head, a user can visibly confirm the less elastic material, forexample, the polyamide, is included in the head and pocket.

After the material introduced into the mold cavity is allowed to cure,the lacrosse head and its components, for example the scoop, sidewallsand base as well as a throat, are fully formed. The mold portions 1380Aand 1380B can be moved in direction N, generally away from the moldportion 1380C as shown in FIGS. 45B and 45C. Any locator pins 1380P alsocan be withdrawn into the mold portion 1380C. Thereafter, the moldedhead and now integral pocket can be removed from the mold 1380.

After molding, the edge 1316, perimeter flange or outer pocket perimeterin general, of the lacrosse pocket 1310 are overmolded, and completelyencapsulated by and concealed within the respective portions of thelacrosse head 20. The edge, perimeter flange or outer pocket perimeterproject downwardly from the lowermost portion of the lacrosse head,without any other lacrosse head structure or component extending belowthe edge, perimeter flange or outer pocket perimeter. As an example,there optionally is no other structure under the edge or perimeterflange to secure or clamp the pocket to the head.

Generally, upon removal, the pocket is inextricably joined with thelacrosse head, and cannot be removed without damaging or destroyingeither the pocket and/or the head. Of course, in some otherconstructions, special removal mechanisms can enable nondestructiveremoval of the pocket from the head. With this construction, no part ofthe lacrosse pocket 1310 need be trimmed from the sidewall, scoop, baseor other component of the lacrosse head when the lacrosse pocket andcomponents of the lacrosse head are removed from the mold 1380. This canprovide a clean appearing product, which need not be further manually ormechanically manipulated to trim off unsightly extra material of thepocket or otherwise modify the lacrosse head.

Optionally, the pocket can include a polymer layer that is secured viathermal bonding, adhesives or other constructions to the pocket.Generally, this polymer layer can provide additional grip and enhancefriction between the pocket and a lacrosse ball held within the pocket.The polymer layer can be constructed from TPU, EVA, rubber, siliconeand/or certain tacky or adhesive materials. To thermally bond thepolymer layer to the pocket, the polymer layer can be placed betweenportions of a heat press that compresses and heats the polymer layer andportions of the pocket to effectively bond those elements to oneanother. In some constructions, the polymer layer can be a sheet or filmof polymer material that is compressed and heated, and thereby melts,fuses and/or bonds to the strands of the pocket in preselected areas. Inmost cases, the polymer layer can be bonded to the interior of thepocket so that it faces and is configured to engage a lacrosse ball heldin the pocket. In this construction, the polymer layer can be disposedonly on the front surface of the pocket rather than the rearward facingsurface distal from the ball receiving area of the pocket.

Further optionally, the polymer layer can be selectively disposed incertain areas of the pocket. As an example, the polymer layer can beselectively disposed over the runners to provide a raised surface abovethe remainder of the interior of the pocket upon which a lacrosse ballis guided when it is shot from or exits the pocket. The polymer layer inthis region can include a texture and/or can be raised above the surfaceof the pocket by approximately 0.2 mm to 2 mm. when textured, thepolymer layer can include a plurality of nodes separated from oneanother by a plurality of valleys. The nodes can extend upwardly fromthe valleys a distance of approximately 0.1 mm to 1 mm.

Even further optionally, the polymer layer can be selectively disposedalong the pocket sidewalls adjacent the middle pocket. In such aconstruction, the polymer layer can be configured to differently or froma different material to reduce the friction between the lacrosse balland the pocket in that area. For example, the polymer layer can be inthe form of a film disposed over the strands of certain joint elementsand vertical elements, and in some cases optionally can extendcompletely over openings in the middle pocket. The polymer layer can beconstructed from a low friction, flexible material. In turn, this canenable a lacrosse ball to be held in the middle pocket relatively firmlyby the pocket structure, yet still exit the pocket in a low frictionmanner due to the polymer layer. Sometimes, the middle pocket can beconstructed with elements that effectively squeeze the lacrosse balltherein, however with the polymer layer reducing friction between thepocket and a lacrosse ball, the ball can still easily exit the middlepocket when the ball is forced in a particular direction, for exampletoward the scoop and/or along the longitudinal axis. The polymer layercan also be oriented in strips in the middle pocket so that friction isreduced only in a particular direction, for example, parallel to and/oralong the longitudinal axis of the pocket.

XVII. Fourteenth Alternative Embodiment

A fourteenth alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustratedin FIGS. 52-55 and generally designated 1410. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above, for example, the thirteenth alternative embodiment,with several exceptions. To begin, the fourteenth alternative embodiment1410 of the lacrosse pocket and its components are constructed from aunitary textile material and is manufactured from strands, which likethe embodiments above, can be in the form of threads, cables, yarn,fibers, filaments, cords and other strand-like elongated structures.Strands, however, optionally can exclude large diameter or dimension(greater than 2.0 mm and/or greater than 3.0 mm) laces, thongs or nylonwebs that are manually tied or connected to one another or otherstructures. The entire unitary textile material can be produced throughmachine implemented, mechanical manipulation of strands on an automatedpocket assembly machine thereby producing weaved, knitted or some othertextile material.

Incidentally, large diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/orgreater than 3.0 mm) laces, webs and strings are not knitted or weaveddirectly with the strands of the unitary textile material. However,these large diameter or dimension laces, webs or thongs can be snakedthrough tubular components or other structures integrally formed in theknitted or weaved structure as described below or placed through holesdefined by the knitted or weaved structure. This is not the same asthose elements being knitted (interlooped) or weaved with the strands ofthe unitary textile material; and this contrasts conventionaltraditional lacrosse pockets, which are formed almost substantially fromlarge diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/or 3.0 mm) laces,webs, runners and thongs.

The pocket 1410 can include all the features and functions of thethirteenth embodiment pocket 1310 as well. In addition, the pocket canbe integrally molded to a lacrosse head 120, where the head and pockethave the same structural and functional characteristics as those of thehead and pocket in the thirteenth embodiment above. In addition, thehead and pocket can be integrally combined and/or formed using the samestructure or methods as described above in connection with thethirteenth embodiment, or any other embodiments herein for that matter.

In this fourteenth embodiment, however, the head 120, with itsintegrally molded pocket, can be further integrally molded with alacrosse handle 190 as shown in FIG. 52. To produce this construction,during a molding process in which the material of the head to 120encapsulates and overmolds a portion of the pocket 1410, the handle 190also can be simultaneously molded, formed. Accordingly this embodimentprovides a true one piece integral lacrosse stick including the head,pocket and handle, all as one unit. There are no laces or stringsjoining the pocket to the head, nor is there a screw or other fastenerjoining the head to the handle.

With this combination of features, a complete one-piece stick includingan integral pocket can be repeatedly and consistently manufactured andprovided to consumers. This contrasts the inconsistency that plaguesconventional multi-component, pieced together lacrosse sticks. Forexample, there has been inconsistency between individual manually formedpockets, as well as the manual attachment of those manually formedpockets to respective heads. As a further example, there also has beeninconsistency in the attachment of a head to a handle. In some cases,the head and handle combination might not be a perfect fit, which canlead to a weak or wobbly connection between the head and handle. Inother cases, with a removable head and handle, the plastic in the throatof the head can stretch out or become deformed. This can be problematicwhere the head is secured to the handle at a junction via a fastenersuch as a screw, bolt or pin. Over time, the fastener attached head canloosen relative to the handle, eventually becoming unacceptably wobblywith play over time. With the present embodiment, all of the aboveinconsistencies and problems can be eliminated. The present embodimentalso provides a unitary lacrosse stick that addresses many of thefatigue issues associated with previous head to handle fastenerconnections. The one piece integral stick including the head, handle andintegral pocket of the current embodiment also can be engineered andmanufactured in a repeatable manner.

As shown in FIG. 53, the lacrosse handle 190 can be of a preselectedcross sectional shape, such as an octagonal shape. Of course, in otherconstructions, the cross sectional shape can be circular, round,elliptical, polygonal or other shapes. The handle 190 can include a bore190B. This bore can be of the same cross sectional shape as the exteriorof the handle. This bore can also be specially formed during the moldingprocess in which the head and handle are optionally simultaneouslyformed. The bore 190B can extend longitudinally along a shaftlongitudinal axis SLA that extends from a first end 190E1 to a secondend 190E2 of the shaft or handle 190. With this construction, the handlecan generally be of a tubular configuration. In other optionalconstructions, the bore can be deleted, so that the handle is a solidcontinuous piece, without a bore on the interior. Further, if desired,the bore 190B can terminate at some location 190M between the first end190E1 and second end 190E2. With such a construction, the handle betweenthe termination portion 190M and the second end 190E2 can be solid. Thiscan be helpful in some cases where it is desired to reduce flex orotherwise provide more rigidity near the base 123 of the head 120. Ofcourse, the handle can be solid in other portions between the end 190E1and the head 120, depending on the particular application.

With reference to FIGS. 52 and 53, it can be seen that the end 190E2 ofthe handle 190 is integrally formed and joined with the lacrosse head120, and particular its base 123. The base 123 and end 190E2 of thehandle transition smoothly and cleanly to one another without anyvisible seams. Again this because material forming each of thesecomponents is intermixed and intermingled with one another during amolding process.

The method of manufacturing the one-piece lacrosse stick including theintegral lacrosse pocket, head and handle will now be described withreference to FIGS. 54-56. FIGS. 54 and 55 illustrate the mold 1480 thatis used to construct the one-piece lacrosse stick. The mold can includeopposing portions 1480A and 1480B. These respective portions cancollectively define a head mold cavity 1480FC, which can include a basemold cavity 1480BA, a scoop mold cavity 1480SC and sidewall moldcavities 1480SW. These cavities and the head mold cavity can besubstantially identical to the mold in the thirteenth embodimentdescribed above. In addition, however the mold 1480 can include a handlemold cavity 1480HC in fluid communication with a head cavity 1480FC, andin particular the base mold cavity 1480BA. With this fluidcommunication, any molten material or liquid in the head cavity andhandle mold cavity can intermingle and intermix with one another to someextent during a molding process.

As illustrated in FIGS. 54 and 55 the mold 1480 also can include asecondary handle slide 1490. This handle slide 1490 can include a boreproducing extension 1481. This bore producing extension is typically inplace within the handle cavity while the handle cavity 1490HC is filledwith a molten material or liquid to form the handle 190. Thus, the boreproducing extension 1481 can form the bore 190B in the handle. Thelength of the extension 1481 can be varied depending on the desiredlength of the bore in relation to the first end 190E1 and second end190E2 of the handle. The exterior surfaces of the extension 1481 alsocan be modified depending on the desired cross section of the bore.Alternatively, a bore can be produced using a gas assist technique inwhich gas is introduced into molten material in the handle cavity toform the bore 190B. Of course, if no bore is desired in the handle, thehandle slide 1490 can be deleted from the mold 1480.

The method of manufacturing the one-piece lacrosse stick can begin withstep 1401 in FIG. 56 of providing a lacrosse pocket 1410, of the typedescribed in any of the embodiments described above, for example, thepocket 1310 in the thirteenth embodiment. As with that embodiment, theouter perimeter, edge or perimeter flange of the pocket 1410 is placedwithin the respective mold cavities 1480SC, 1480BA and 1480SW, as shownin step 1402. Again these mold cavities make up the head cavity 1480FC.This head cavity is in fluid communication with the handle cavity1490HC. If the handle is desired to define a bore, the bore producingextension 1481 is placed within the handle cavity 1490HC.

In step 1403, a molten material or liquid is introduced into the headcavity 1480FC so that it encapsulates a portion of the pocket 1410 asdescribed in connection with the thirteenth embodiment above. Moltenmaterial is also introduced into the handle cavity 1490HC in step 1404,which can be simultaneous with step 1403. Because the handle cavity andhead cavity are in fluid communication with one another, the moltenmaterial or and/or liquid forming the head and forming the handle canintermingle and/or intermix. Optionally, in some cases, different moltenmaterials can be introduced into the head cavity versus the handlecavity. This can be helpful where different properties are desired ofeach of these components. Indeed, multiple different molten or liquidmaterials can be introduced into the mold cavities, depending on theparticular performance characteristics of the one-piece lacrosse stick.

Where the bore producing extension 1481 is included in the handlecavity, it can effectively form the bore 190B in the handle during theintroducing step 1404. After the molten material or liquid hassufficient time to cure, the mold 1480 can be opened. For example, thebore forming extension 1481 can be withdrawn from the handle cavity1490HC in direction L as shown in FIG. 55. At this point, the bore 190Bis effectively formed in the handle 190. The mold portions 1480A and1480B can be separated. In step 1404, the unitary one-piece lacrossestick including a pocket integrally molded in the lacrosse head, whichis itself integrally molded to the lacrosse handle 190, can be removedfrom the head and mold cavities.

XVIII. Fifteenth Alternative Embodiment

A fifteenth alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustratedin FIGS. 57-58 and generally designated 1510. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above, for example, the thirteenth alternative embodiment,with several exceptions. To begin, the fifteenth alternative embodiment1510 of the lacrosse pocket and its components are constructed from aunitary textile material and is manufactured from strands, which likethe embodiments above, can be in the form of threads, cables, yarn,fibers, filaments, cords and other strand-like elongated structures.Strands, however, optionally can exclude large diameter or dimension(greater than 2.0 mm and/or greater than 3.0 mm) laces, thongs or nylonwebs that are manually tied or connected to one another or otherstructures. The entire unitary textile material can be produced throughmachine implemented, mechanical manipulation of strands on an automatedpocket assembly machine thereby producing weaved, knitted or some othertextile material. Large diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mmand/or greater than 3.0 mm) laces, webs and strings are not knitted orweaved directly with the strands of the unitary textile material.However, these large diameter or dimension laces, webs or thongs can besnaked through tubular components or other structures integrally formedin the knitted or weaved structure as described below or placed throughholes defined by the knitted or weaved structure. This is not the sameas those elements being knitted (interlooped) or weaved with the strandsof the unitary textile material; and this contrasts conventionaltraditional lacrosse pockets, which are formed almost substantially fromlarge diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/or 3.0 mm) laces,webs, runners and thongs.

The pocket 1510 can include all the features and functionality of thethirteenth embodiment pocket 1310 as well. In addition, the pocket canbe integrally molded to a lacrosse head 120 (shown in broken lines),where the head and pocket have the same structural and functionalcharacteristics as those of the head and pocket in the thirteenthembodiment above. In addition, the head and pocket can be integrallycombined and/or formed using the same structure and methods as describedabove in connection with the thirteenth embodiment, or any otherembodiments.

In this fifteenth embodiment, however, a particular method ofmanufacturing a lacrosse pocket, for example, that of the thirteenthalternative embodiment, that is integral with a lacrosse head isprovided. In general, to perform the method, an automated pocketassembly machine is used to produce the lacrosse pocket from certaindata that pertains to the pocket. A mold is used to join the producedlacrosse pocket with a lacrosse head by over molding portions of thelacrosse head over corresponding portions of the lacrosse pocket.

The method can provide an automatic pocket and head manufacturing methodwhere a manufacturer can replicate pocket features, such as the locationof the apex of the pocket, curvature of a ball channel shooting rampand/or shooting strings, and the like, in a repeatable fashion, from onepocket to the next. This can provide previously unheard of consistencyfrom one lacrosse pocket to another because the manual manipulation andconnection of the pocket to the head is eliminated. With the method,there is no longer any need to manually lace a pocket to a head.Further, because the pocket is produced on an automated assemblymachine, its features are precisely reproduced with each and every copyof the pocket output from the machine.

In addition, with conventional manufacturing processes, it is virtuallyimpossible to create a performance pocket having an apex where the ballwill naturally come to rest in a precise location that does not start tochange after a player catches or shoots a ball several times. Currenthand strung materials stretch and change as they are stressed in theactivities of catching, throwing and shooting a lacrosse ball. It alsois virtually impossible to produce a hand strung pocket with repeatableperformance because as the pocket changes, the performance of it changesas well. With the current embodiments, it is possible to repeatedly andconsistently manufacture a performance pocket having an apex, ballchannel and/or shooting ramp curvature and other features in precise,predefined locations therein, where the pocket will last exponentiallylonger than conventional pockets, and will provide repeatableperformance multiple times.

As mentioned in the embodiments above, the lacrosse pocket can beconstructed from a unitary textile material on an automated pocketassembly machine. Generally, the pocket is formed completely via amechanized manipulation of a plurality of strands, without any directhuman manipulation of the strands during the method of the strands toincorporate them into the pocket. The mechanized manipulation can be viaknitting and/or weaving for example on a machine. Although describedherein in connection with a knitting process on a knitting machine, itwill be appreciated that the pocket can be weaved on a weaving machineusing a weaving process. Thus, all the steps, configurations, structuresand operations applied to knitting herein apply by analogy to weaving;and any description of the knitting process can be applied equally byanalogy to the weaving process.

The knitting process can be any of a variety of different knittingprocesses, for example circular knitting, tubular knitting, flatknitting, sweater knitting, Jacquard knitting, Intarsia knitting, weftknitting, warp knitting and other types of knitting. When a weavingprocess is utilized, the process can be any one of multiple weavingprocesses, including processes that construct a leno weave, a twillweave, a hatch weave, a slit weave, a plain weave, a baskets weave, aJacquard weave, a Rib weave and an Oxford weave or other types ofweaves.

The knitting machine can be any type of sophisticated knitting machine,such as the knitting machines described herein. The knitting machine canmechanically manipulate a plurality of flexible, elongated strands ofthe unitary textile pocket and/or pocket body during a knitting processto form the pocket 1510, and all its components and features, such asthose explained above in connection with the thirteenth embodiment,which apply equally to this embodiment. As noted above, the automatedmachine can perform a tubular knitting process in which multiple tubularelements are knitted and joined to form the various components andstructure of the pocket. If desired, the tubular knitting process canalso implement a weft knitting technique.

The three dimensional shape of the pocket can include a concave shapedisposed or located generally within the middle pocket and/or shootingramp. The three dimensional shape also can encompass substantiallyplanar and/or convex regions of the pocket, for example in the shootingramp and/or shooting ramp flanks, which optionally does not includeknitted tubular elements. The machine itself can be configured tointerloop a plurality of first strands with a plurality of secondstrands, and any number of additional strands, so as to form thatpredefined, three dimensional shape in the pocket and/or pocket body.The machine also can mechanically manipulate other strands, oroptionally the same strands, but different portions thereof, of theunitary textile material with a knitting machine during the knittingprocess to form the above mentioned predefined generally flat planarshapes in the pocket body and/or predefined three dimensional convexshapes in the pocket body. The latter shapes can correspond generallywith the shooting ramp flanks SRF1, SRF2, the respective edges 1510U,1510L, 1514 and/or 1516, perimeter flange, or outer perimeter 1510PF, orother portions of the pocket 1510 shown in FIG. 57.

During the knitting process, the knitting machine knits a unitarytextile pocket and body so as to form the respective components of thepocket and pocket body. In doing so, the knitting machine shown in FIG.58 draws a plurality of different strands 1593A, 1593B off of respectivecones or spools 1594A and 1594B. Optionally, these strands can beconstructed from different materials, for example materials havingdifferent elasticities or different mechanical properties as explainedabove in connection with first and second materials of the thirteenthalternative embodiment. These strands are fed to respective needlesand/or armatures 1595A, 1595B which perform the knitting operation toform the components of the pocket 1510. The needles and/or armatures canbe driven by the machine and/or controller. Generally, the lacrossepocket data from the controller can be transformed, translated orotherwise converted by the automated pocket assuming machine to aplurality of signals. The signals can be transmitted to or otherwisecontrol the needle and/or armature to direct the needle and/or armatureto perform their automated movements to selectively incorporate therespective strands within the lacrosse pocket at predefined locations ina predefined pattern.

As an example, the signals can direct the needles and/or armature toeither interloop and/or weave one strand with another during themechanical manipulation by the machine. As a more particular example,the knitting machine knits the upper edge 1510U, the first and secondsidewall edges 1516, the lower edge 1510L, the shooting ramp SR2, themiddle pocket MP5, the bullseye opening 1550B, the runners 1541, 1542and the shooting ramp flanks SRF′ which have their respective predefinedshapes and associated knitting patterns. All of these different knittedcomponents of the pocket body are contiguous and continuous with oneanother, being formed from the plurality of strands that make up theunitary textile material. Indeed, many of the individual strands canspan the length of the pocket, back and forth in rows of each of thecomponents, from the upper edge 1510U to the lower edge 1510L, and canbe interlooped in specific regions of the pocket, thereby forming andbecoming integrated with the different knit patterns of the pocket.

As one example, a knitting machine can interloop a first strand with asecond strand near the lower edge 1510L. The first strand can continuein a plurality of rows into a vertical element 151C1 through the middlepocket MP5 and shooting ramp SR2. In the shooting ramp SR2, that strandcan be interlooped with additional strands within the knit pattern 1550.The same strand can extend into and be interlooped with yet otherstrands in the knit pattern 1518. The strand can extend and be furtherinterlooped with yet other strands in the upper edge 1510U of thelacrosse pocket. As will be appreciated, all of the same structuresdescribed above in connection with the other embodiments, for examplethe thirteenth embodiment above, can be formed with similar knitting ormechanical manipulation techniques.

As shown in FIG. 58, further optionally, the knitting or weavingmachine, or other automated pocket assembly machine 1590, can becontrolled by a controller 1591 to produce the pocket 1510. Thecontroller can be any conventional processor, computer or othercomputing device. The controller can be electrically coupled to themachine, and can be in communication with a memory 1591M, a data storagemodule, a network, a server, a cloud or other construct, all of whichare considered a memory herein. The memory can store and/or transferlacrosse pocket data in various forms to or from the automated pocketassembly machine. Although shown as separate elements, the controllerand machine can be integrated into one component.

The lacrosse pocket data can be a particular type of data pertaining toone or more lacrosse pockets and/or portions of lacrosse pockets. Forexample, the lacrosse pocket data can be data pertaining to one or moreparticular knitting patterns or stitches, weaving patterns or stitches,or other patterns or stiches associated with and/or incorporated intothe lacrosse pocket. As one example, the lacrosse pocket data can bedata that relates to the combination of particular knitting patternsused to construct different portions of a lacrosse pocket. As a moreparticular example, the data can be the precise location and type ofknitting structure in a particular location of the pocket. While thedata may not reflect or readily translate to a particular lacrossepocket structure, such as an apex of the pocket, a bullseye opening, anouter perimeter or perimeter flange, pocket openings, shooting flanks,runners or the like, the fact that those components can be produced withthe data means that the data pertains to those features and structures,or others, depending on the application.

The lacrosse pocket data can be implemented, accessed and/or utilized,all generally referred to as utilized herein, by the automated assemblymachine, whether in the form of a code or a program or other directive.The lacrosse pocket data, when utilized to form the pocket with theassembly machine, ultimately can generate in the pocket, certainfeatures (and therefore, the data pertains to those features), such as:the predefined three-dimensional shape; the position, dimension,curvature and/or depth of a middle pocket; the position of an apex ofthe pocket; the length, curvature and location of an outer pocketperimeter; the position, curvature and dimension of various edges of thepocket; the position, curvature and dimension of a shooting ramp, alsoreferred to as a ball channel; the position, curvature and dimension therunners and/or shooting strings of the pocket; the side to side lateralwidth of the pocket; the minimum width of the pocket; the maximum widthof the pocket; the side to side curvature of the middle pocket and thelike.

The controller can access the lacrosse pocket data to thereby controlthe automated pocket assembly machine and produce one or more lacrossepockets in a desired number and configuration, optionally individuallyand/or in a strip of lacrosse pockets, depending on the application.Each constructed lacrosse pocket can include a substantially identicalpredefined three-dimensional shape, and can have virtually identicalphysical features, such as those enumerated above in connection with thelacrosse pocket data.

After the lacrosse pocket 1510 is formed with the automated pocketassembly machine 1590, it is removed from the machine and readied forovermolding with a lacrosse head to integrally join the pocket with thelacrosse head, as in the thirteenth embodiment above. The mold used toform the lacrosse head can be the same as that illustrated in FIGS. 45B,45C, 45D and 45E of the thirteenth alternative embodiment above, and theresulting output of the molding process can be the same as theconstruction shown in FIGS. 45A and 45E.

An optional alternative mold 1580 that can be used to overmold thepocket is shown in FIG. 59. The mold 1580 includes first and secondportions 1580A and 1580B. The mold portion 1580A includes a threedimensional contour 1580C which is shaped similarly to the threedimensional contour of the already formed lacrosse pocket. The moldportion 1580A also can include a plurality of locating pins 1580P, whichcan be similar or identical in structure to the locating pins in thethirteenth alternative embodiment above. The pins can function similarlyto retain a lacrosse pocket over the three dimensional contour 1580C andadequately extend a perimeter flange 1580PF into the respective portionsof the mold cavity 1580 FC which can be further defined in the secondmold portion 1580B.

In operation, the mold portions 1580A and 1580B are moved toward oneanother to complete the head cavity 1580FC and its respective componentportions, with the perimeter flange of the lacrosse pocket being locatedin the head cavity 1580FC, again similar to that of the thirteenthalternative embodiment above. Molten or liquid material, for examplepolymeric material or other materials as described above in the otherembodiments, is introduced into the head cavity. The lacrosse pocket,and in particular its perimeter flange, or perimeter can be embedded inand encapsulated by the material forming the respective portions of thehead, for example the scoop, sidewalls and the base. As with thethirteenth alternative embodiment, the head is allowed to cure to form acured lacrosse head having a scoop, base, sidewalls and other componentsof the lacrosse head. The resulting structure of the pocket over moldedby the head can be similar to that of the thirteenth alternativeembodiment described in connection with FIG. 45A. The lacrosse pocket1510 can be secured to the lacrosse head 120 without having beenmanually strong to the lacrosse head with laces or other structuresmanipulated by a human during the molding process or otherwise.

Exemplary methods of utilizing the knitting machine and mold to producea lacrosse pocket that is integrally overmolded by a lacrosse head willnow be further explained with reference to FIG. 60. Generally, themethod includes the steps of: mechanically manipulating one or morestrands within automated pocket assembly machine utilizing lacrossepocket data to form a lacrosse pocket, step 1501; placing a portion ofthe lacrosse pocket in a mold cavity corresponding to a lacrosse head,step 1502; molding a material to the portion of the lacrosse pocket,step 1503; and removing a cured lacrosse head with the first lacrossepocket attached to it from the mold cavity, step 1504.

Optionally, the method can include a step of storing lacrosse pocketdata in memory and utilizing it to drive or operate the automated pocketassembly machine or otherwise produce the lacrosse pocket in anautomated fashion. As mentioned above, the automated pocket assemblymachine 1590 can be in communication with a controller 1591 which canaccess the lacrosse pocket data in a memory 1591M. The lacrosse pocketdata, as mentioned above can be in various forms, and optionally can beimplemented in code, programs or other directives. While the data may bein the form of particular knitting, weaving or other pattern data orcode, without any specific identification of features of the pocket,such as the apex, the outer perimeter or perimeter flange, openings,shooting ramps or other structures, that data still pertains to thosefeatures of the pocket.

The method can include different ways to collect, compile and store thelacrosse pocket data in memory. For example, the lacrosse pocket data,or parameters that can be translated into the lacrosse pocket data, canbe based on input to the controller provided by a user related todifferent features of a lacrosse head. For example, the user can inputinto the controller or store in memory specific characteristics offeatures, such as: an apex located between a scoop portion and a baseportion of the lacrosse pocket; the length, location and boundaries ofan outer perimeter or perimeter flange, the predefined three-dimensionalshape of the pocket; the position, dimension, curvature and/or depth ofa middle pocket; the position, curvature and dimension of various edgesof the pocket; the position, curvature and dimension of a shooting ramp,also referred to as a ball channel; the position, curvature anddimension the runners and/or shooting strings of the pocket; the side toside lateral width of the pocket; the minimum width of the pocket; themaximum width of the pocket; the side to side curvature of the middlepocket and the like. All of these characteristics can be input into aprogram or code, which can then automatically translate thecharacteristics into lacrosse pocket data, such as data relating toknitting patterns, weaving patterns or other assembly patterns,pertaining to those characteristics.

Alternatively, these characteristics can be utilized to generate one ormore sample lacrosse pockets, for example by providing thosecharacteristics to an experienced technician of automated pocketassembly machines. The technician can translate the characteristics intoa corresponding set of lacrosse pocket data. The lacrosse pocket datacan be in the form of data and/or code relating to particular knittingpatterns, weaving patterns or other assembly patterns that can, whenread and/or received by the automated assembly machine, carry outoperations to implement the characteristics in the form of a lacrossepocket. In some cases, the technician can construct multiple iterationsof samples via experimentation, until a preferred lacrosse pocketstructure is identified and produced. When that preferred lacrossepocket structure is so identified and produced, the related lacrossepocket data used to generate that pocket can be stored in memory as aparticular file, unique to that preferred lacrosse pocket structure.Optionally, the technician can select one or more particularcharacteristics of the pocket to program the controller and produce apocket of a preferred profile. For example, the technician can identifya theoretical position of the bullseye opening and/or an apex based onthe specific characteristics of those features stored in memory. Thetechnician can then write a knitting program comprised of lacrossepocket data based on the estimated location of the apex and/or bullseyeopening (optionally, along an anticipated longitudinal axis of thepocket). The technician can then use the machine to produce the pocket,utilizing the lacrosse pocket data. The technician can review theconstructed pocket and determine whether the bullseye opening and/orapex is where it is desired to be located relative to the relatedcharacteristics in the memory. If the bullseye opening and/or apex arein place, the produced pocket is a success and related lacrosse pocketdata can be stored. If not, the technician will modify the lacrossepocket data and associated program to move the bullseye opening and/orapex (e.g. longitudinally along the longitudinal axis) to therebyproduce a modified new pocket. The technician will utilize that data toproduce yet another pocket on the machine, and inspect it to see if itis a successful, and to see if production of the pocket, the bullseyeand/or apex are where they should be. The technician can repeat thisiterative process multiple times before producing a final pocket withall the desired characteristics. It should be understood that theiterative process utilized by the technician can include use of theautomated translation process described herein. For instance, thetechnician can utilize an automatic translation processor to generatelacrosse pocket data. If the technician determines an adjustment isworthwhile, he can adjust one or more settings, including one or morecharacteristics of the lacrosse pocket data and one or more parametersused by the automated translation processor to generate the lacrossepocket data, to thereby produce a modified new pocket.

Multiple lacrosse pocket data in multiple files can be generated for avariety of different lacrosse pockets having different characteristics.Because most of lacrosse pockets can be identified as low pockets,mid-pockets or high pockets, the different lacrosse pocket data canpertain to the structure and characteristics of those different low, midand high pockets. For example, a low pocket generally includes an apex,corresponding to the greatest depth of the pocket located centrally on alongitudinal axis of the pocket, where the apex is disposed between amiddle pocket and a lower portion or lower edge of the lacrosse pocket.First lacrosse pocket data can be stored in memory that pertains to thislow pocket construction. As another example, a mid-pocket generallyincludes an apex disposed within the middle pocket, that is, aboutmidway between the upper edge and lower edge of the pocket. Secondlacrosse pocket data can be stored in memory that pertains to thismid-pocket construction. As yet another example, a high pocket generallyincludes an apex disposed between the middle pocket and the upper edgeor scoop portion of the pocket. The third lacrosse pocket data can bestored in memory that pertains to this high pocket construction. Therespective first, second and third lacrosse pocket data can be stored indifferent files and identified accordingly. When a user desires tomanufacture a particular pocket, such as a low pocket, the user canaccess the data related to that pocket in a particular file in memory.This data can then be used to guide the mechanical manipulation ofstrands with the automated pocket assembly machine to form theparticular pocket and its features including for example athree-dimensional contour, an apex located in a particular locationand/or a ball channel curvature, all corresponding to the respectivelacrosse pocket data.

As mentioned above, the method can include different ways to collect,compile and store the lacrosse pocket data in memory. Another way tocollect and store lacrosse pocket data is to start with an existinglacrosse pocket that is manually strung by a human to a lacrosse head.With reference to FIGS. 61-62, and imaging device 1597 can be used tocapture an image of a first lacrosse pocket 1599 joined with a firstlacrosse head 1599H, The first lacrosse pocket 1599 can be secured tothe head with laces 1599L that are strung manually by a human betweenthe pocket and the head. That lacrosse pocket 1599 can include anon-planar, three dimensional concave contour 15993D. Although shownonly as extending in the plane of the drawing, the three dimensionalcontour can extend laterally across the width of the pocket as well. Thelacrosse pocket 1599 can define an apex 1599A, which can be locatedwithin a bullseye opening, and can generally form the deepest depth ofthe pocket; and can include a pocket boundary 1599B. This pocketboundary can be the outermost extent of the pocket 1599. Because thepocket is hand strung, the boundary can be located adjacent thecorresponding portions of the lacrosse head 1599H.

The lacrosse pocket 1599 can be imaged by the imaging device 1597, whichcan be a high-definition camera, a digitizing camera, or any otherdevice capable of capturing images and/or data associated with anobject. As an example, the imaging device 1597 can conduct athree-dimensional scan of an object to produce model information fromwhich a three-dimensional digital model can be generated. A variety ofthree-dimensional models can be generated from the model information,including, for example, a polygon mesh mode, a surface model and a pointcloud. The three-dimensional model or the model information, or both,may be editable by a user to enable modifications prior to translationof the model information to lacrosse pocket data for use in generatingthe lacrosse pocket 1510. Examples of such three-dimensional imagingdevices include an active-scanner that actively emits radiation or lightand detects the reflected radiation or light, and a passive-scanner thatdetects reflected ambient radiation.

The imaging device 1597 in the illustrated embodiment can be directlycontrolled by the controller 1591, and can communicate information tothe controller 1591 relating to the scanned object. Optionally, theimaging device 1597 may be operated separate from the controller 1591,and may communicate information, such as scanned information or modelinformation, to the controller 1591 to facilitate generation of lacrossepocket data. For instance, a user or technician may utilize the imagingdevice 1597 to scan the pocket 1599 to generate scanned information fromwhich a three-dimensional model of the pocket 1599 can be produced. Thisscanned information can be communicated, via a wired interface or awireless interface, or both, to the controller 1591. Thethree-dimensional imaging device can be a portable device, such as acamera-enabled mobile phone. With such a mobile phone, a lacrosse playercan generate scanned information relating to a three-dimensional modelof the pocket 1599, and communicate the scanned information to atechnician or the controller 1591, or both, to be used as a basis forgenerating the lacrosse pocket 1510.

The scanned information can be provided to the technician or thecontroller 1591, or both, in conjunction with a point-of-sale interfacethat allows the user to order a lacrosse pocket based on the pocket1599. The point-of-sale interface can be provided by any type of device,including a web-enabled or a network-enabled device or a standalonedevice located at a retailer location. For instance, the point-of-saleinterface can be communicated via a network to a point-of-sale terminal(e.g., a mobile phone or portable device), and enable selection andpurchase of a manufactured lacrosse pocket, a lacrosse head, or anintegrated lacrosse pocket and lacrosse head, or a combination thereof.The point-of-sale terminal can include the imaging device 1597 to scanthe pocket 1599, or the point-of-sale terminal can receive scannedinformation relating to the pocket 1599 from another device. The scannedinformation or the model information of the pocket 1599 can beconsidered a digitized or digital form of the pocket 1599. Based on thescanned information or the model information of the pocket 1599, thepoint-of-sale terminal can suggest one or more options available forselection and ordering, including, for example, a lacrosse pocket basedon the digital form of the pocket 1599, and an integrated lacrossepocket and lacrosse head based on the digital form of the pocket 1599.Additionally, the point-of-sale terminal can enable selection andordering of a substantial reproduction of a lacrosse pocket associatedwith a lacrosse head possessed by a professional lacrosse player, or anintegrated lacrosse pocket and lacrosse head that is a substantialreproduction of the same possessed by the professional lacrosse player.The point-of-sale interface can also enable a user to adapt one or morefeatures of a selected lacrosse pocket or a scanned lacrosse pocket, orboth, to customize their order, including, for example, changing thelocation of the apex or the curvature of the shooting ramp. After a userhas selected the desired options for their order, the point-of-saleterminal can communicate the order in the form of a point-of-salerequest to a transaction processor for fulfilment.

After the image and/or associated data of the lacrosse pocket 1599 iscaptured with the imaging device, that image and its associated data canbe digitized into a digital form that can be processed by the controlleror some other computing device and then transferred to the controller.Based on the image of the first lacrosse pocket, and/or the digitizeddata relating to the image, either the controller or a machinetechnician can generate first lacrosse pocket data, as described hereinalone. This lacrosse pocket data can be stored in memory, for example1591M of the controller 1591. Generation of the first lacrosse pocketdata from the digital form of the lacrosse pocket 1599 can be fullyautomated or manually performed. Optionally, the first lacrosse pocketdata can be generated using automation in conjunction with manual input.Generation of the first lacrosse pocket data from the digitized form ofthe lacrosse pocket 1599 can be conducted completely or partially by atranslation processor. The translation processor can form part of thecontroller 1591, or can be separate therefrom. The translation processorcan be configured to perform instructions according to a translationmodule that is stored in memory or a computer readable medium and thatcan be accessed by a technician to generate the first lacrosse pocketdata based on the digital form of the lacrosse pocket 1599.

The translation processor can process the digitized form of the lacrossepocket 1599 or the digitized lacrosse pocket to identify one or more ofthe features described herein in connection with the lacrosse pocketdata. For instance, the translation processor can use scannedinformation relating to the lacrosse pocket 1599 to identify theposition, dimension, curvature and/or depth of the middle pocket; theposition of an apex of the pocket; the length, curvature and location ofan outer pocket perimeter; the position, curvature and dimension ofvarious edges of the pocket; the position, curvature and dimension of ashooting ramp, also referred to as a ball channel; the position,curvature and dimension the runners and/or shooting strings of thepocket; the side to side lateral width of the pocket; the minimum widthof the pocket; the maximum width of the pocket; the side to sidecurvature of the middle pocket and the like. To facilitateidentification of these features, the translation processor may orientits frame of reference or determine a frame of reference based onidentification one or more generally known points, locations, orqualities, or a combination thereof, of the lacrosse pocket 1599. Forinstance, the distance between the uppermost and lowermost edges of thelacrosse pocket 1599 likely corresponds to the longest distance betweenany two features, and generally defines the longitudinal axis LA of thelacrosse pocket 1599.

The leftmost and rightmost edges of the lacrosse pocket 1599 can beidentified by projecting features of the digitized lacrosse pocket ontoone or more test planes that contain the longitudinal axis LA. (Inpractice, there are an infinite number of planes that contain thelongitudinal axis LA, but a subset of available test planes can beanalyzed by the translation processor, such as using 360 test planesthat are each about 1 degree relative to each other about thelongitudinal axis LA.) The translation processor may identify a singleplane within these one or more test planes that includes two pointswhose distance from each other, in a direction perpendicular to thelongitudinal axis LA, is the largest among all points (in a directionperpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA) for all of the one or moretest planes. These two points likely correspond to the leftmost andrightmost edges of the digitized lacrosse pocket 1599 as projected ontothe identified plane. The identified plane can be considered the faceplane and can be used as a reference plane for determining one or moreof the features of the lacrosse pocket data described herein. The faceplane in one embodiment may be determined using an iterative method orprocess of inspecting several test planes until the face plane isidentified.

The translation processor can also orient the face plane to identify thefront and rear faces thereof with respect to the digitized lacrossehead. A point farthest from the face plane along a directionperpendicular or normal to the face plane likely corresponds to the apexof the digitized lacrosse pocket. Because the apex is generallyconsidered the rearmost feature of a lacrosse pocket relative to theface plane, identification of the apex relative to the face plane canaid in differentiating between the front and rear faces of the faceplane. Further, identification of the apex can facilitate identificationof a point of origin for the reference frame. The point of original canbe identified as the intersection between (a) the longitudinal axis LAand (b) a line normal to the face plane and containing the apex. Thetranslation processor can use the identified face plane and the point oforigin as a frame of reference for determining one of more of thefeatures of the lacrosse pocket data in a consistent manner. Forexample, the depth of the apex relative to the face plane has alreadybeen determined, but the translation processor can also determine, basedon the frame of reference, the position of the uppermost and lowermostportions of the digitized lacrosse pocket relative to the point oforigin. As another example, the side to side lateral width of the pocketcan be determined based on point of origin, the identified frame ofreference, or the location of the apex, or a combination thereof. In yetanother example, the curvature and dimension of one or more features,such as the middle pocket and the shooting ramp, can be determined basedon the frame of reference, the position of the apex and the uppermostedge of the digitized lacrosse pocket. The curvature or dimension, orboth, of the shooting flanks can be determined based on the curvatureand dimension of the middle pocket and the shooting ramp. The determinedone or more features of the digitized lacrosse pocket can be stored inmemory as the first lacrosse pocket data, or further processed to arriveat the first lacrosse pocket data. The first lacrosse pocket data, asdescribed herein, can be used as a basis for automatically generating anew lacrosse pocket. Optionally, in addition to or alternative todetermining the one or more features, the digitized lacrosse pocket canbe stored in memory and used to directly generate a set of instructionsfor automatically generating a new lacrosse pocket that is substantiallysimilar to the lacrosse pocket 1599.

Optionally, the translation processor described herein can be configuredto identify a type or class of a lacrosse head associated with thelacrosse pocket 1599 based on the information provided by the imagingdevice 1597. For instance, the translation processor can identify a typeof lacrosse head based on the lateral width, the longitudinal length,the apex, the ball channel, and the like, or a combination thereof, ofthe digitized lacrosse pocket. The translation processor can facilitategeneration the lacrosse pocket 1599 to be constructed with a lacrossehead substantially identical to the identified head. It is noted thereis a possibility that a particular type of lacrosse head that is scannedby the imaging device 1597 may no longer be in production, or may bedifferent from those available from a particular manufacturer. In suchcircumstances, the translation processor can identify a nearest fitlacrosse head that is available or a plurality of similar but availablelacrosse heads based on the information provided by the imaging device1597. The translation processor can adjust one or more parameters of thelacrosse pocket data to generate a lacrosse pocket 1510 that is similarto the lacrosse pocket 1599 but tailored to fit a currently available orcurrently selected lacrosse head. For instance, the translationprocessor can adjust the curvature and dimension of the shooting rampand the curvature and dimension of the shooting flanks based on thecurrently selected head having a wider or narrower overall lateralwidth. The point-of-sale interface can be configured to identify ascanned lacrosse head type based on the scanned information, and enableselection of a nearest fit lacrosse head or one of multiple identifiedand similar lacrosse heads for purchase in conjunction with the lacrossepocket 1510.

The method can include a step of selecting particular lacrosse pocketdata from the memory to implement the mechanical manipulation. Thisparticular lacrosse pocket data can be incorporated into a lacrossepocket data library. The lacrosse pocket data library can includevarious lacrosse pocket data for constructing complete, individuallacrosse pockets. These individual lacrosse pockets can be constructedaccording to user driven or user selected pocket profile preferences.For example, there can be multiple sets of lacrosse pocket data thatpertains to first, second, third, fourth, etc. different pockets storedin the library, which can be associated with the memory. A user can usethe controller to select one of the different sets of lacrosse pocketdata from the library to manufacture selected ones of the differentpockets. If desired, the lacrosse pocket data optionally can bealterable or selectable so that a user can generate a modified versionof a particular lacrosse pocket based on manipulation of that pocket'slacrosse pocket data. For example, this can entail selecting lacrossepocket data pertaining to a first lacrosse pocket and generating amodified version of the lacrosse pocket data pertaining to the firstlacrosse pocket. The modified version of the lacrosse pocket data caninclude a particular knitting pattern, weaving pattern or other datathat has been altered or modified to provide a slightly differentconfiguration of the first lacrosse pocket. For example, whenimplemented to construct the pocket, the data can be utilized togenerate a modified version of the first lacrosse pocket that has: anapex in a different location than the first lacrosse pocket; an outerpocket perimeter that is different from the perimeter of the firstlacrosse pocket; edges of a pocket that are different from the firstlacrosse pocket; a shooting ramp or ball channel is different from thefirst lacrosse pocket; runners, shooting strings and/or shooting flanksthat are different from the first lacrosse pocket and the like. Thedifferences between the modified version of the pocket in the actualfirst lacrosse pocket can be subtle or significant, depending on thelevel of modification to the first lacrosse pocket.

Alternatively, the lacrosse pocket data can be separated within thelibrary into subsets of data that pertain only to lacrosse pocketcomponents, for example, individual parts of the lacrosse pocket such asthe middle pocket; an apex of the pocket; an outer pocket perimeter;various edges of the pocket; the position, a shooting ramp, alsoreferred to as a ball channel; runners and/or shooting strings of thepocket; the shooting flanks and the like. Based on this library, a user,the machine or controller can mix and match different lacrosse pocketdata pertaining to different parts of a lacrosse pocket thereby formingan entirely new or unique lacrosse pocket having preselected parts, theconstruction of which is driven by the different lacrosse pocket datapertaining to those different parts and combined to form the completelacrosse pocket. Generally, because any number of lacrosse pocket datapertaining to individual components of a lacrosse pocket can be enteredto the library, there is almost an infinite number of combinations ofthat lacrosse pocket data to produce an almost infinite number ofdifferent lacrosse pockets.

Referring to FIG. 60, with further regard to step 1501, the controller1591 and/or the automated pocket assembly machine 1590 are configured toutilize the lacrosse pocket data to guide mechanical manipulation ofvarious strands 1593A, 1593B of material with the automated pocketassembly machine. This can be accomplished via pulling one or moredifferent strands, from the spools and toward the needles and/orarmatures 1595A, 1595B of the machine 1590. The needles and armaturesare guided in movement by the machine 1590, which again is directed bythe controller utilizing the lacrosse pocket data. Optionally, if themechanical manipulation includes knitting, various strands can beinterlooped with one another in courses and wales within the knittedpocket, where weft knitting is optionally implemented via the machine.

Optionally, the strands can be constructed from one or more differentmaterials such as described in the embodiments above. For example, somestrands can be constructed from a first material which can be lesselastic and/or more abrasion resistant and durable than second strandsconstructed from another material. The first material can be at leastone of an aromatic polyamide and an ultra-high molecular weightpolyethylene. One suitable aromatic polyamide is poly-para-phenyleneterephthalamide. Other relatively inelastic, durable, high-strengthmaterials are also contemplated. The second material can be athermoplastic polymer, for example high density or high strengthpolyethylene, polypropylene and/or a polyethylene multifiber yarn.Others synthetic or natural materials also can be included as the secondmaterial.

As a result of the mechanical manipulation in step 1501 as describedabove, the lacrosse pocket 1510 including the strands is formed. Thislacrosse pocket can include features as described above, including butnot limited to the predefined three-dimensional shape; the position,dimension, curvature and/or depth of a middle pocket; the position of anapex of the pocket; the length, curvature and location of an outerpocket perimeter; the position, curvature and dimension of various edgesof the pocket; the position, curvature and dimension of a shooting ramp,also referred to as a ball channel; the position, curvature anddimension the runners and/or shooting strings of the pocket; the side toside lateral width of the pocket; the minimum width of the pocket; theside to side curvature of the middle pocket and the like. The pocket1510 also includes the various knitted elements that form each of theabove features, for example the join elements, vertical elements, edges,perimeter flange, etc., each of which can be constructed as describedabove and in connection with the thirteenth alternative embodiment.

As with the thirteenth embodiment, the perimeter flange 1510PFoptionally can be at least 2.0 mm, at least 2.5 mm wide, at least 4.0mm, at least 5.0 mm or wider. The perimeter flange can be the portion ofthe lacrosse pocket 1510 that is over molded by at least a portion ofthe lacrosse head in joining the lacrosse pocket 1510 to the lacrossehead 120. Where the perimeter flange is at least the width mentionedabove, it has been discovered that there is enough structure of thepocket to satisfactorily embed and securely join the pocket body withthe portion of the head into which the perimeter flange is molded. Withwidths of the perimeter flange that are significantly less than thosementioned above, it is possible that, without extra reinforcement or theuse of special materials, the perimeter flange and pocket can rip ortear out from the overmolded polymeric material from which the head isconstructed. This can be simply due to not enough pocket beingsatisfactorily anchored within the overmolded head material.

If desired, the mechanical manipulation step 1501 can optionally outputmultiple individual but substantially identical lacrosse pockets formedalong a common strip of pockets. These lacrosse pockets can be joinedend for end with one another along the strip, in a manner similar tothat described in the thirteenth alternative embodiment above. Theindividual pockets can be separated from one another as mentioned inthat embodiment, for example by shearing, hot melt cutting, die cuttingand/or laser cutting, or otherwise removing a connecting strand orinterface portion to separate pockets.

With the lacrosse pocket produced in step 1501, that pocket can then bereadied for overmolded in step 1502. In general, step 1502 can includeplacing the lacrosse pocket 1510 over the mold portion 1580C. Where themold portion includes locating pins 1580P, the perimeter flange 1510PFcan be joined with those locating pins, optionally placing the pinsthrough locating pin openings in the perimeter flange such as thosedescribed above in connection with the thirteenth alternative embodimentof the pocket. Alternatively, where other structures are used to holdthe pocket in place, though structures can be actuated. In placing theperimeter flange, the upper edge 1510U can first be placed on thelocating pins 1380P in the region of the scoop. The side edges 1516 canthen be placed over the locating pins 1380P in that region of the mold.The lower edge 1510L can be joined with the locating pins in that regionafter that. Sometimes, the placement of the perimeter flange on the pinscan create a tension T across the pocket as described in connection withFIG. 45C. Further, the perimeter flange 1510PF can be precisely placedwithin the respective mold cavities to provide desired distance of theperimeter flange projecting into the mold and placement relative to thesidewalls of the cavity in which the perimeter flange is placed, asdescribed in connection with the thirteenth alternative embodimentreferring to FIG. 45C. The mold portions 1580A and 1580B can be closedto complete the head cavity 1580FC including the respective scoop, sidewall and base mold cavities. The perimeter flange remains disposed inportions of those cavities.

After the lacrosse pocket 1510 is placed in the mold 1580, the moldingin step 1503 can commence. In general, the output of this step is in alacrosse pocket embedded within portions of a cured lacrosse head,unable to be removed from the lacrosse head without destroying at leastone of the lacrosse head and the lacrosse pocket. The molding can beginby introducing a molten material or liquid into the mold cavity 1580C tosubstantially fill the mold cavity and its respective scoop, base andsidewall mold cavities, with the perimeter flange remaining in thesecavities. As the material is introduced, it extends and/or flowsthorough the cavity, and also between adjacent ones of a plurality ofstrands within the perimeter flange in the cavity, also referred to asan outer perimeter, optionally simultaneously disposed in the differentcomponent cavities. The material can flow from a first side of theperimeter flange to a second side of the perimeter flange 1510PF.

As in the thirteenth embodiment, when the material contacts therespective edges and/or generally the perimeter flange disposed in thecavity 1580FC, the material, optionally under pressure, encapsulates theindividual strands, coating their surfaces on front and back. Thematerial also can extend from a front or first surface of the perimeterflange that faces generally toward the pocket longitudinal axis LA, to asecond surface or outside of the perimeter flange that faces generallyaway from the pocket longitudinal axis. In many cases, the material alsopermeates through small spaces between the individual strands,connecting the injected material from one side of the flange or edge tothe other. This, in turn, embeds the material within the edges and/orperimeter flange. Where the strands are knitted within the perimeterflange, those strands are typically interlooped with one another, or asingle strand is interlooped with itself, in multiple columns and rows.In these cases, the strand or strands form one or more loops in theperimeter flange. The introduced material thus permeates through and/orflows through the openings at the interlooped portions of the strand(s),in some cases impregnating the strands and/or spaces between the strandswith the material in the perimeter flange. Optionally, the pocket isplaced within the mold so that the molten material or liquid material isprevented from entering openings adjacent the perimeter flange. This canbe accomplished simply by not positioning those openings within therespective mold cavities. Accordingly, these larger openings, which cancontribute to the functionality of the middle pocket or other componentsof the pocket, are not filled with material.

After the injected material cures to form the lacrosse head portions, itembeds within and extends through the openings of the portion of theedge that was within the mold. Again, these openings can be formedbetween adjacent interweave strands, or between loops formed from one ormore continuous strands in a knit pattern. The material also canencapsulate one or more of the plurality of individual strands,surrounding or circumferentiating each substantially entirely so thatall outer surfaces of the strand are within the molten material. Withthe above embedding, the perimeter flange is sufficiently trapped andmolded within the respective portion of the head to anchor it thereunder the rigors of use during a lacrosse activity.

In some cases, where multiple lacrosse pockets are formed in themechanical manipulation step, those additional lacrosse pockets can besequentially molded one by one in the mold, or in a mass mold capable ofmolding of multiple pockets simultaneously. The process for over moldingeach of these additional lacrosse pockets similar to that above entailsgenerally placing portions of the individual lacrosse pockets in themold cavity introducing the molten material and/or liquid into the moldcavity to encapsulate the portions of the traditional lacrosse pockets.The resulting lacrosse pockets mounted in the heads are identical to oneanother.

After the molten material and/or liquid is satisfactorily introducedinto the mold cavity to form the components of the head and encapsulatethe perimeter flange, that material is allowed to cure to form a curedlacrosse head 120. The cured lacrosse head includes the variousrespective components, such as a scoop, side walls, and a base, as wellas an optional throat. The cured lacrosse head can be removed from themold in step 1504, and in particular the mold cavity again with theouter perimeter or perimeter flange of a lacrosse pocket remainingembedded within the lacrosse head. Optionally, during this step, anylocator pins can be retracted from the formed head and respectiveopenings in the perimeter flange to facilitate removal of the head fromthe mold. Additional ejectors can further ejector otherwise push thecompleted lacrosse head out from the mold, as explained in thethirteenth embodiment and applied to this embodiment.

Further optionally, during the molding step 1503, the lowermost portionof a lacrosse head can be molded. When the cured lacrosse head isremoved in step 1504 from the mold cavity, however, no structure extendsbelow the portion of the lacrosse pocket that is molded into the curedlacrosse head. As an example, there is no secondary frame or otherstructure that is joined with the lowermost portion of the lacrosse headto sandwich or secure any portion of the pocket to the lacrosse head.The anchoring and attachment of the pocket is completed with theencapsulation of the perimeter flange in the respective lacrosse headportions. Further, the perimeter flange optionally can extend from thelowermost portion of the structure forming the complete lacrosse head.

Depending on the desired number of completed lacrosse heads includingintegrally formed lacrosse pockets, the above steps of mechanicallymanipulating, placing, molding and removing can be repeated to producemultiple identical lacrosse heads with corresponding identical lacrossepockets all attached thereto. In this manner multiple identical lacrosseheads can be produced on a mass scale and sold to consumers. Each suchproduced lacrosse head and pocket is virtually identical and dimension,contour and features to provide unparalleled consistency.

Optionally, as mentioned above, the method can include different ways tocollect, compile and store the lacrosse pocket data in memory, one ofwhich is to start with an existing lacrosse pocket that is manuallystrung by a human to a lacrosse head. This existing lacrosse pocket cancome from a variety of sources. For example, the lacrosse pocket can bea pocket that is associated with a head possessed by a professionallacrosse player. In some circles, consumers desire to have a particularpocket and/or associated head that mimics those of a professionallacrosse player. To address this desire, a manufacturer or other personor entity can identify a professional lacrosse player who is generallyadmired by amateur lacrosse players. The professional player can bepopular due to their good performance, capabilities and/or personality.The lacrosse pocket of the professional lacrosse player can be imagedand lacrosse pocket data relating to that image can be generated. Thislacrosse pocket data can be used to manufacture or form one or moresamples of second lacrosse pockets that are identical to that of theprofessional lacrosse player. In some cases, the second lacrosse pocketscan be joined with heads using the overmolding methods herein, and soldto consumers, such as amateur players who admire the professionallacrosse player, desiring to have lacrosse pockets and heads similar tothat of the professional lacrosse player. If desired, a significantsupply of lacrosse pockets and associated over molded heads can bemanufactured in response to a particular consumer demand.

Where the pockets are manufactured using the precise lacrosse pocketdata, the manufactured pocket can include a three dimensional concavecontour corresponding to the three dimensional concave contour of thepocket of the professional lacrosse player, immediately upon formationof the pocket. The manufactured pocket also or alternatively can includea second apex located in a location corresponding to the apex andlocation of the professional lacrosse player's pocket immediately uponformation. The manufactured pocket also or alternatively can include aball channel curvature corresponding to the ball channel curvature ofthe professional lacrosse player's pocket immediately upon formation. Ingeneral, the manufactured pocket can mimic any of the characteristics offeatures of the professional lacrosse player's pocket.

If desired, the professional lacrosse player can request an additionalsupply of one or more lacrosse heads from a manufacturer having lacrossepockets that precisely match her existing pocket, which can be a handstrung pocket. With the current embodiments, that precise pocket can bereplicated consistently to form multiple lacrosse pockets, andoptionally lacrosse heads joined with or overmolded to the pockets, forsupply to the professional lacrosse player.

Optionally, the lacrosse pocket data associated with a professionallacrosse player's pocket, an amateur player's pocket, or any lacrosseplayer's pocket, can be stored in a file in a library, which itself canbe stored in memory. Indeed, lacrosse pocket data corresponding to aplurality of lacrosse player's pockets can be stored in the library.This library and the respective lacrosse pocket data can be selectivelyaccessed by a manufacturer to generate lacrosse pockets, identical tothose corresponding to the lacrosse pocket data, for consumers. Theconsumers can place orders with a manufacturer to produce a desiredpocket using preselected lacrosse pocket data, optionally offered viaaccess to the library of different lacrosse pocket data. This library,or certain pocket characteristics associated with the lacrosse pocketdata, optionally can be accessible to consumers by subscription via theInternet or some other medium from a manufacturer, distributor and/orretailer.

In an actual manufacturing setting, a manufacturer can collect or designand store multiple lacrosse pocket data in memory, each of whichcorrespond to a lacrosse pocket of a lacrosse player, and/or atheoretical construction or design of a lacrosse pocket. Upon receivinga request or order from a consumer for the construction of a particularpocket, optionally joined with a corresponding head, the manufacturercan access the requested lacrosse pocket data. That data can beselectively input or otherwise accessed by the controller, which in turncontrols the automated pocket assembly machine to produce a pocketincluding the features of the pocket associated with the lacrosse pocketdata. The lacrosse pocket can thus be constructed. After it isconstructed it can be overmolded with a lacrosse head according to theembodiments herein to produce a lacrosse head having an integrallyformed lacrosse pocket attached thereto. This product can then beshipped directly to the consumer from the manufacturer, or through otheracceptable channels of trade.

XIX. Sixteenth Alternative Embodiment

A sixteenth alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustratedin FIGS. 63-68 and generally designated 1610. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above, for example, the thirteenth alternative embodiment,with several exceptions. To begin, the sixteenth alternative embodiment1610 of the lacrosse pocket and its components are constructed from aunitary textile material and is manufactured from strands, which likethe embodiments above, can be in the form of threads, cables, yarn,fibers, filaments, cords and other strand-like elongated structures.Strands, however, optionally can exclude large diameter or dimension(greater than 2.0 mm and/or greater than 3.0 mm) laces, thongs or nylonwebs that are manually tied or connected to one another or otherstructures. The entire unitary textile material can be produced throughmachine implemented, mechanical manipulation of strands on an automatedpocket assembly machine thereby producing weaved, knitted or some othertextile material. Large diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mmand/or greater than 3.0 mm) laces, webs and strings are not knitted orweaved directly with the strands of the unitary textile material.However, these large diameter or dimension laces, webs or thongs can besnaked through tubular components or other structures integrally formedin the knitted or weaved structure as described below or placed throughholes defined by the knitted or weaved structure. This is not the sameas those elements being knitted (interlooped) or weaved with the strandsof the unitary textile material. This can contrast conventionaltraditional lacrosse pockets, which are formed almost substantially fromlarge diameter or dimension (greater than 2.0 mm and/or 3.0 mm) laces,webs, runners and thongs.

The pocket 1610 can include all the features and functionality of thethirteenth embodiment pocket 1310 as well. For example, the pocket 1610can include a pocket body 1610B that includes and/or is joined directlywith a perimeter flange 1610PF. The pocket 1610 can include an upperedge 1610U opposite a lower edge 1610L. Side edges 1614 and 1616 canalso lie opposite one another across a longitudinal axis LA of thepocket, which longitudinal axis generally bisects the pocket into equalsized left and right sides.

As shown in FIG. 63, the edges, 1610U, 1610L, 1614 and 1616 as well asthe body 1610B can be formed from one or more pocket strands 1694P and1690P. The pocket strand can be in the form of a perimeter strand 1694P,which can be used to construct a substantial portion of the perimeterflange 1610PF. Although shown as a single strand, there can be multipleperimeter strands. A pocket strand also can be in the form of a bodystrand 1690P. Any of the pocket strands herein can be formed by twistingtogether individual strands to form one or more plies, and twisting theone or more plies with additional strands or two or more additionalplies to construct a pocket strand that is resistant to unraveling, doesnot kink, and/or is relatively balanced rotationally.

Where a pocket strand is in the form of a perimeter strand 1694P, itoptionally can be constructed from strands of a first material, whichcan be less elastic, and/or more abrasion resistant and durable than thesecond material. Optionally, the first material can be at least one ofan aromatic polyamide and an ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene.One suitable aromatic polyamide is poly-para-phenylene terephthalamide,sold under the commercial name of KEVLAR® by DuPont of Wilmington, Del.The first material optionally can have strands having: a tensile modulusof elasticity of optionally 400-1000 g/d, further optionally 500-900g/d, and even further optionally at least 500 g/d; an elongation atbreak of optionally 1.0% to 10.0%, further optionally of 3.0% to 2.4%,further optionally 3.6%; a breaking tenacity of optionally 100-300cN/tex, further optionally 150-250 cN/tex, even further optionally203-208 cN/tex; and a tensile strength of optionally about 2,000-10,000MPa, further optionally 3,000-6,000 MPa and even further optionallyabout 3,600 MPa. This first material can be less elastic and moreabrasion resistant and durable and tear resistant than the secondmaterial used in for example, the middle pocket shooting ramp orshooting ramp flanks. Another suitable first material can be a melt-spunpolyolefin multifilament yarn, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,074,483,which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, and soldunder the commercial name of INNEGRA by Innegra Technologies ofGreenville, S.C. Another suitable first material is an aromaticpolyester, sold under the commercial name VECTRAN by Kuraray Co., Ltd.Of Tokyo, Japan.

The perimeter strand, as shown in FIG. 63 can be spooled off of a spool1694S including a single individual strand 1694 of the first materialdescribed above. This strand 1694, shown in the direction of the arrowsL is mechanically manipulated by an automated pocket assembly machine inan automated process, such as those described above, optionallyutilizing lacrosse pocket data, to manufacture the perimeter flange1610PF. When making the perimeter flange, the perimeter strand can beknitted, weaved or otherwise combined and joined in a stitchless,seamless manner with the body portion 1610B of a lacrosse pocket, and inparticular with any body strand 1690P that is adjacent the perimeterflange. Further optionally, these different pocket strands can beinterlooped, interweaved, twisted, braided or otherwise combined withone another at a interface between the lacrosse pocket body 1610 B andits perimeter flange 1610PF.

The remainder of the body 1610B inside the perimeter flange 1610PF, thatis, the portion of the body inside the broken lines in FIG. 63, can beconstructed from a second material. Optionally, the second material canbe a plurality of strands of a thermoplastic polymer, for example highdensity or high strength polyethylene, polypropylene, a polyethylenemulti-fiber yarn and/or nylon microfibers. The second materialoptionally can have strands having: a modulus of elasticity ofoptionally 0.1-2.0 GPa, further optionally 0.5-1.0 GPa; elongation atbreak of optionally greater than 50%, further optionally greater than100%, even further optionally greater than 500%; and a tenacity ofoptionally 20-350 kN/tex, further optionally 30-320 kN/tex, and evenfurther optionally 50-100 kN/tex, and even further optionally less than150 kN/tex. The second material can include strands optionally in arange of 100 Denier to 1000 Denier, further optionally 150 Denier to 840Denier, even further optionally 210 Denier to 750 Denier, yet furtheroptionally 300 Denier and/or 420 Denier.

Referring in more detail to FIGS. 63-67, the pocket strand 1690P, whichcan be in the form of a body strand used to manufacture at least aportion of the body 1610B, can be constructed from multiple individualstrands. In particular, a first strand 1691, optionally constructed fromthe second material above, can be spooled on a spool 1691S. A secondstrand 1692, optionally also constructed from the second material above,can be spooled on another spool 1692S. These first and second strands1691 and 1692 can be twisted in a clockwise or counterclockwisedirection with a spinner 1697. The precise direction of the twisting canbe preselected, depending on the particular attributes of the pocketstrand 1690P.

More particularly, the pocket strand 1690P can be in the form of one ormore spun first plies 1670S and 1670Z, which are twistedcounterclockwise and clockwise, respectively. These plies and therelevant twisting are better understood with reference to FIGS. 64-67.FIG. 64 illustrates the first strand 1691 and second strand 1692 beingtwisted in a counterclockwise direction. The result of thiscounterclockwise twisting results in a counterclockwise twisted firstply 1670S. Likewise, FIG. 66 illustrates the first strand 1691 andsecond strand 1692 being twisted in a clockwise direction. The result ofthis clockwise twisting results in a clockwise twisted first ply 1670Z.Incidentally, the different first plies in FIGS. 64 and 66 areillustrated with the individual strands 1691 in 1692 loosely twistedtogether. Upon further spinning and/or incorporation into the lacrossepocket, these plies can be more tightly twisted. Further, it will beappreciated that with the current embodiments, the individual first andsecond strands can be twisted in a first and second rotationaldirection, generally clockwise and counterclockwise, depending on theapplication.

In the method of the sixteenth embodiment, the first plies 1670S and/or1670Z can be combined with additional plies and/or additional strands ofmaterial. For example, as shown in FIGS. 63, 65 and 67, the first ply1670S can be twisted with a third strand 1693 in a first direction.Additionally or alternatively, the first ply 1670Z can be twisted withthe third strand 1693 in a second, opposite direction. In particular, athird strand 1693, optionally constructed from the first materialdescribed above, can be spooled on a third spool 1693S. This thirdstrand can be introduced to and co-mingled or engaged with, one or moreof the plies 1670S and/or 1670Z via the spinner 1698.

As an example, referring to FIG. 65, the third strand 1693 can betwisted in a clockwise manner with the first ply 1670S via the spinner1698. This in turn forms the pocket strand 1675Z. Because the first andsecond strands 1691 and 1692 are twisted counterclockwise CCW to formthe ply 1670S (FIG. 64), and that strand 1670S is twisted in an oppositedirection, namely clockwise C with that ply 1670S, the net result isthat the pocket strand 1675Z is less prone to unraveling, kinking orotherwise becoming distorted. This is primarily due to the rotationaltwists in the respective ply and strand within that strand 1675Zcountering one another to resist the same.

As a further example, referring to FIG. 67, the third strand 1693 can betwisted in a clockwise manner with the first ply 1670Z via the spinner1698. This in turn forms the pocket strand 1675S. Because the first andsecond strands 1691 and 1692 are twisted clockwise C to form the ply1670Z (FIG. 66), and that strand 1670Z is twisted in an oppositedirection, namely counterclockwise CCW with that ply 1670Z, the netresult is that the pocket strand 1675S is less prone to unraveling,kinking or otherwise becoming distorted. This is primarily due to therotational twists in the respective ply and strand within that strand1675S countering one another to resist the same.

Optionally, a variety of different first plies can be utilized andincluded in the body 16106 and/or the perimeter flange 1610PF. As anexample, plies like 1675Z and 1675S can be combined, for exampleknitted, weaved, or otherwise combined with one another to form thosecomponents, depending on the application. In other cases, it may besuitable to manipulate the three dimensional contour of the pocket 1610using the natural twisting proclivity of certain plies and/or strands.In such cases, the tendency of the first plies 1670S and 1670Z to twistand/or unravel in a particular direction might not be countered bytwisting them in particular directions with other individual strands orother plies.

Further optionally, instead of twisting the respective individualstrands and plies as noted above, the resulting pocket strands 1675Z and1675S, as well as the pocket strand 1694P, can be pre-manufactured,optionally by a supplier, at a location distal from the mechanicalmanipulation of the pocket strands and/or perimeter strands to form thepocket. Thus the pocket strands and their components can be provided onsite, being manufactured at the location of the automated process,and/or provided by an off-site supplier, being pre-manufactured offsite, and to be incorporated into the pocket. The finished, twistedpocket strands can be spun on an individual spool and can bemechanically manipulated by the automated pocket assembly machine tomanufacture the components of the lacrosse pocket 1610, optionallyutilizing lacrosse pocket data as described in the embodiments above.Even further optionally, the perimeter strand 1694P can be constructedutilizing a combination of twisted individual strands and plies, such asthose in the construction of the pocket body strand 1690P. Likewise, thepocket body strand 1690P can be constructed from a single individualstrand of material, like that of the perimeter flange 1694P as describedabove, depending on the application.

In some cases, as mentioned above, the first plies can be combined withsecond plies, instead of being combined with individual strands. Forexample, as shown in another aspect of the sixteenth embodiment in FIG.68, a pocket strand 1690P′ can be formed from multiple plies, such asfirst and second plies 1670S′ and 1670Z′. In particular, the ply 1670S′can be constructed from multiple individual strands 1691′ that aretwisted together in a first direction, such as a counterclockwisedirection. The second ply 1670Z′ can be constructed from multipleindividual strands 1692′ that are twisted together in an oppositedirection, such as a clockwise direction. These resulting plies can bethen twisted together in a counterclockwise or clockwise orientation toform the pocket strand 1690P′.

Due to the counterclockwise and clockwise twisting of the respectiveplies, in combination with the counterclockwise or clockwise twisting ofthose plies with one another in the finished pocket strand 1690P′, therotational forces and natural tendency of the plies to rotate can becountered, so that the finished pocket string 1690P′ is resistant tounraveling, kinking or otherwise becoming distorted. The precise numberof individual strands 1691′ and 1692′ can be modified as well as therate of twist of the plies (turns per meter) in the pocket strand tofurther prevent, adjust, and/or modify the tendency of the finishedpocket strand to unravel, kink and/or become distorted.

In addition, although not shown, in any of the constructions of thisembodiment, the number of strands twisted with other strands can bevaried in number significantly. For example, the ply 1670S can beconstructed from first, second and many additional strands. Likewise thethird strand 1693 can be constructed from a number of additionalindividual strands twisted in a clockwise and/or counterclockwisedirection with it. Depending on the application, the number of strandsused in different plies and finished pocket strands can varyconsiderably.

When the pocket 1610 is finished, it can be integrally molded to alacrosse head (not shown), where the head and pocket have the samestructural and functional characteristics as those of the head andpocket in the thirteenth embodiment above. In addition, the head andpocket can be integrally combined and/or formed using the same structureand methods as described above in connection with the thirteenthembodiment, or any other embodiments herein.

XX. Seventeenth Alternative Embodiment

A seventeenth alternative embodiment of a lacrosse pocket is illustratedin FIGS. 69-91 and generally designated 1710. The pocket shown there issimilar in structure, function, and operation to the embodimentsdescribed above, for example, the thirteenth alternative embodiment,with exceptions. At least a portion of the pocket is formed with strandsthat are fusible to form one or more fused pocket areas, optionally incombination with any of the different knit and/or weave patternsdescribed above. The shape, dimensions, and location of the fused pocketarea can vary to provide the pocket with regions having differentphysical and/or mechanical properties. For example, the fused pocketarea(s) can be configured to provide the pocket with differentelasticities, stretch capabilities, different support, differentrecovery, different abrasion-resistance, and/or different rigidity toprovide the desired pocket performance features. Non-limiting examplesof pocket performance features include guiding the ball into the pocketduring catching/scooping of the ball, guiding the ball out of the pocketduring shooting, cradling the ball, pocket area rigidity, pocket areastability, and/or pocket area durability.

As shown in FIG. 69, the lacrosse pocket body 1710B generally includesseveral different regions, including a middle pocket MP4 whichtransitions at transition T to a shooting ramp SR. The shooting ramp SRis disposed between knitted or weaved runners 1741 and 1742. When thelacrosse pocket body 1710B is formed from a unitary textile material, asillustrated in FIG. 69, the runners 1741 and 1742 are integrally formedwith the unitary textile material. In contrast to the lacrosse pocket1310 of the thirteenth embodiment, the lacrosse pocket 1710 includesfused areas, which in the present example forms the runners 1741 and1742. The remaining areas of the lacrosse pocket 1710, such as themiddle pocket MP4, transition T, shooting ramp SR, and/or shooting rampflanks SRF1 and SRF2, optionally remain unfused.

The unitary textile material forming the lacrosse pocket body 1710Bincludes a plurality of strands, at least a portion of which are formedfrom a fusible material, such as a thermoplastic material. A fusingtreatment can be applied to specific areas of the lacrosse pocket body1710B, such as the area forming the runners 1741 and 1742, to cause thethermoplastic strands to melt and/or soften. The melted and/or softenedthermoplastic strands at least partially spread over adjacentunmolten/unsoftened strands and/or intermingle with adjacentmolten/softened strands. The fused pocket areas are formed as themelted/softened material solidifies.

The pocket 1710 can be formed from a textile material constructedaccording to any of the embodiments described herein, for example thethirteenth or the sixteenth embodiments. One or more of the strands usedto knit or weave the pocket textile material may be a fusible strandthat includes a fusible thermoplastic polymer material, non-limitingexamples of which include polyurethane, nylon, polyester, polyolefin,and polyamide. The fusible strands may be formed from a single, fusiblematerial or multiple layers of materials in which an outer layer is afusible material. For example, the fusible strands can include a fusiblematerial layer surrounding an interior strand material, which may or maynot be fusible, in a core-sheath type configuration. In another example,a strand or strip of fusible material may be applied to a strand madefrom a non-fusible material. Following a fusing treatment, the fusiblestrand material melts and/or softens to form a “molten” material that atleast partially surrounds the non-fusible material, forming a coated orpartially coated strand.

Optionally, the fusible strand may be formed entirely of a thermoplasticpolymer material or include a thermoplastic polymer coating. Thethermoplastic polymer coating may be applied using any known technique,non-limiting examples of which include co-extrusion, dip coating, andspray coating. Optionally, the thermoplastic polymer coating is areactive coating material that exhibits thermoplastic properties priorto curing and thermosetting properties after it has been exposed tocuring conditions. Such a reactive coating exhibits thermoplasticproperties below a certain temperature, allowing the materialmelt/soften and fuse with adjacent strands. Following a curingtreatment, the reactive coating cures and to a material with thermosetproperties, such as by forming cross links, for example. The curingtreatment can include heating the material to a second temperature,higher than the first temperature at which the thermoplastic materialmelts and fuses. Optionally, the curing treatment includes increasedtemperature and pressure and/or the addition of a cross-linking agent.One non-limiting example of a reactive coating includes an acrylic acidcopolymer and a cross-linking agent. Optionally, the reactive coating isa material available from BASF Corporation under the tradename ACRODUR®.In this manner, the fused pocket area may be thermoset, which canincrease the hardness and/or stiffness of the fused pocket area.

Optionally, the fusible strand may be constructed from a firstthermoplastic polymer with a first melting temperature and a secondthermoplastics polymer with a second melting temperature that is lessthan the first melting temperature. The first and second thermoplasticpolymers may be configured in a core-sheath type configuration or thesecond thermoplastic polymer may be provided as a strand or stripapplied to the first. A heat-based fusing treatment can be applied heatthe fusible strand to a temperature sufficient to melt the secondthermoplastic polymer, but below the melting temperature of the firstthermoplastic polymer. Further optionally, a fusible strand may becombined or twisted with a non-fusible strand or yarn to form a fusibleyarn including such fusible strand.

Non-fusible material may include natural or synthetic materials that areincapable of fusing or may include a fusible material that is configuredto not fuse during the prescribed fusing treatment. For example, thenon-fusible material may having a higher melting point than the fusiblematerial and thus not melt/soften during the prescribed fusingtreatment.

The fused runners 1741 and 1742 can provide enhanced rigidity andgenerally taut structures to facilitate guiding a ball being shot fromhead 20, for example. The runners 1741 and 1742 can be constructed so asto extend from a region adjacent or forward of the middle pocket MP4outward toward the scoop 28, as shown in FIG. 69. In another example,the runners 1741 and 1742 can be constructed as shown in FIG. 46 toextend from an upper portion 1710U to a lower portion 1710L of thepocket, optionally stopping short of that lower portion 1710L (notshown). Optionally, the runners 1741 and 1742 can be configured suchthat the fused strands are more rigid than the remainder adjacentportions of the pocket main body 1710B, which are not fused. Thisconfiguration can provide a more defined shooting ramp, also referred toas a ball channel, for the lacrosse ball to exit from the lacrosse head20. Fusing certain pocket areas, such as the runners 1741, 1742, theshooting ramp SR, and/or the middle pocket MP4 may facilitatemaintaining the three-dimensional shape of these pocket areas over timeand optionally increase the reproducibility of each lacrosse pocket1710.

Referring now to FIG. 70, a variety of single material and multi-layerfusible strand configurations may be used to form the pocket textilematerial. The pocket 1710 may be made using a knitting machine 1790 inthe same manner as described above with respect to the knitting machine1390 of the thirteenth embodiment, except that at least one of thestrands 1393A, 1393B, and 1393C is replaced with a single material ormulti-layer fusible strand. In one example, all three of the strands1793A, 1793B, and 1793C are in the form of a single material ormulti-layer fusible strand, or a combination of single material andmulti-layer fusible strands. In another example, one or more of thestrands 1793A, 1793B, and 1793C is in the form of a fusible strand whilethe remaining strand(s) are made from a non-fusible material, such as anatural material or a thermoset polymer. Optionally, the strands caninclude fusible strand and non-fusible strands, generally in the form ofa yarn.

The knitting machine 1790 can be configured to knit the fusible strandsthroughout the textile material of the pocket 1710 or only into specificregions of the pocket 1710, such as the runners 1741 and 1742 of thepresent example. During a fusing treatment, the material from thefusible strands 1793A, 1793B, and/or 1793C intermingle with adjacentfusible strands and/or at least partially covers non-fusible strands toform a fused pocket portion. Optionally, lacrosse pocket 1710 can beformed in a manner similar to that described above for the automatedpocket assembly machine 1590 of the fifteenth embodiment, except that atleast one of the strands 1593A and/or 1594B is replaced with a fusiblestrand and/or yarn of fusible and non-fusible strands, as describedabove.

When a combination of fusible and non-fusible strands is used, thethermoplastic material of the fusible strands and the material for thenon-fusible strands can be selected to be compatible such that themelted thermoplastic materials is capable of bonding to the non-fusiblestrands when cooled. Optionally, the thermoplastic material of thefusible strands may not be compatible with the non-fusible strands suchthat little to no bonding between the cooled thermoplastic material andthe adjacent non-fusible strands occurs. In this example, the cooledthermoplastic material bonds to the thermoplastic material of adjacentfusible strand portions. The knit or weave pattern of strands can beconfigured to account for the compatibility between the thermoplasticmaterial of the fusible strands and the non-fusible strands. Joiningfusible and non-fusible materials can facilitate securing the materialstogether, thereby imparting stretch-resistance and/or stiffness to thefused pocket portion. Joining fusible and non-fusible materials can alsodecrease the unraveling of knitted or woven strands, which can decreasestretching of the fused pocket portion and increase the lifetime of thepocket textile material.

Referring now FIGS. 71 and 72, the pocket textile material can includestrands 1791 and 1792 that are twisted in a clockwise orcounterclockwise direction with a spinner in a manner similar to thatdescribed above for the sixteenth embodiment of FIGS. 63-68 to form ahybrid yarn. Strands 1791 and 1792 have different physical propertiesthat can be twisted together to form a hybrid spun ply 1770S. In oneembodiment, strand 1791 is a single material fusible strand that istwisted counterclockwise with a non-fusible material strand 1792 to forma fusible spun ply 1770S. Optionally, the strand 1791 is a multi-layerfusible strand. While FIGS. 71 and 72 are discussed in the context of acounterclockwise twisted ply 1770S and a clockwise twisted pocket strand1775Z, it will be understood that different twist directions anddifferent numbers of strands can be utilized, depending on theapplication.

With reference to FIG. 72, the fusible spun ply 1770S can be twisted ina clockwise manner with a third strand 1793 to form a hybrid pocketstrand 1775Z for use in knitting the lacrosse pocket 1710. When thehybrid pocket strand 1775Z includes one or more fusible strands, thehybrid pocket strand may be referred to as a fusible pocket strand1775Z. The third strand 1793 can be a single material or multi-layerfusible strand that is the same or different from the fusible strand1791. During a fusing treatment, the material of the fusible strand 1791from the fusible spun ply 1770S and the fusible third strand 1793 canintermingle and/or cover at least a portion of the non-fusible strand1792, forming a fused pocket strand 1775Z. The fusible pocket strand1775Z can intermingle and/or surround adjacent fusible pocket strands1775Z to form a fused pocket portion. Optionally, both the strands 1791and 1792 of the fusible spun ply 1770S can be in the form of a singlematerial and/or multi-layer fusible strand while the third strand 1793is formed from a non-fusible material. In another example, all three ofthe strands 1791, 1792, and 1793 forming the fusible pocket strand 1775Zare in the form of a fusible strand.

Referring now to FIGS. 73-74, fusible strands can also be provided inthe pocket textile material to join adjacent strands. FIG. 73illustrates a configuration in which fusible strand 1791′, which issimilar to the fusible strand 1791 of FIG. 71, joins adjacent loops1675Z′ and 1675Z″ of the pocket strand 1675Z of FIG. 65 of thethirteenth embodiment. The thermoplastic material of the fusible strand1791′ and the materials of the pocket strand 1675Z may be selected so asto be compatible for bonding following a fusing treatment. Optionally,the thermoplastic material of the fusible strand 1791′ and the materialsof the pocket strand 1675Z may not be compatible. In this configuration,following a fusing treatment, the thermoplastic material of the fusiblestrand 1791′ may bond with itself and material from adjacent fusiblestrands 1791′.

FIG. 74 illustrates a configuration in which fusible strand 1791′ joinsadjacent loops 1775Z′ and 1775Z″ of the fusible pocket strand 1775Z ofFIG. 72. Following a fusing treatment, the thermoplastic material of thefusible strand 1791′ intermingles and bonds with the thermoplasticmaterial of the fusible strands used in forming the fusible pocketstrands 1775Z. Optionally, when the fusible pocket strands 1775Z′,1775Z″ include fusible strands 1791 and 1793, the thermoplastic materialfrom the fusible strand 1791, fusible strand 1791′, and the thirdfusible strand 1793 can intermingle and bond with one another. In thisconfiguration, the thermoplastic material of the fusible strands 1791,1791′, and 1793 are compatible with one another, and optionallycompatible with the non-fusible strand 1792 of the pocket strand 1775Z.The thermoplastic material of each of the fusible strands 1791, 1791′,and 1793 may be the same or different from each other.

Referring now to FIG. 75, another configuration of a fusible pocketstrand 1775Z″' is illustrated. The fusible pocket strand 1775Z″' caninclude the ply 1670S of FIG. 64 twisted with the third strand 1693 ofFIG. 65. One or more fusible strands 1791″ is applied to the twistedpocket strand 1775Z″' along at least a portion of its length. Followinga fusing treatment, the thermoplastic material of the fusible strand1791″ melts into and around the pocket strand 1775Z″' and bonds withadjacent portions of the strands forming the fusible pocket strand1775Z′″. In this configuration, the melted thermoplastic materialfacilitates bonding between the strands 1691, 1692, and 1693 forming thefusible pocket strand 1775Z″' and/or coating of the strands.

In another example, the fusible strand 1791″ may be applied to thefusible ply 1770S of FIG. 71, which has been twisted with the thirdstrand 1793 of FIG. 72. Following a fusing treatment, the fusible strand1791″ may intermingle and bond with melted portions of adjacent fusiblestrands 1791 and/or 1793. The fusible strand 1791″ in this configurationmay also bond with and/or provide a coating for adjacent portions of thenon-fusible strand 1792.

In another example, a fused pocket area may be formed using fusiblemonofilament strands instead of, optionally in combination with, thefusible or non-fusible strands of the plies and yarns described above. Amonofilament strand can be knit or woven into the unitary textilematerial forming the pocket body 1710B as an individual strand, incontrast to strands that are first combined to produce a yarn and thenthe yarn is knit or woven to form the pocket body 1710B. The fusiblemonofilament strands may be used to form various pocket areas of thepocket body 1710B or join particular pocket areas with adjacent portionsof the pocket body 1710B or head 20. Optionally, combinations ofmonofilament strands and other types of strands, such as plies or yarns,can be knitted/woven together to form different areas of the pocket body1710B.

The monofilament strands may be formed by extrusion of a fusiblepolymeric material. The polymer materials forming the fusiblemonofilament strand and the non-fusible strand which the fusiblemonofilament strand is knit or woven with may include compatiblematerials capable of bonding to each other when the fusible monofilamentpolymer material cools following a fusing treatment. Optionally, thepolymer materials forming the fusible monofilament strand and thenon-fusible strand may be incompatible materials such that only portionsof the fusible monofilament strand in contact with other portions of thefusible monofilament strand may bond.

In one example, a fusible monofilament strand may be knitted/woven withother monofilament strands to form a pocket area that is to be fused,such as the runners 1741, 1742, the middle pocket MP4, and/or theperimeter flange 1710PF. A fusing treatment produces a fused pocket areaformed of fused monofilament strands. Optionally, a fusible monofilamentstrand may be knitted/woven with other types of strands, such as thepocket strands 1675Z of FIG. 65 of the thirteenth embodiment or thepocket strands 1775Z of FIG. 72, to form a pocket area or to joindifferent pocket areas to one another or to the lacrosse head 20.Following a fusing treatment, the melted fusible monofilament canintermingle and/or cover at least a portion of the adjacent strand,whether it be a monofilament strand, spun ply, yarn, or other type ofstrand.

In another embodiment, the monofilament strand may be a non-fusiblestrand that is knitted/woven with any of the fusible strands describedabove, such as the fusible strands 1791, 1791′, 1791″, hybrid spun ply1770S, and hybrid pocket strand 1775Z, and then subjected to a fusingtreatment to form a fused pocket area.

A method of forming a lacrosse pocket 1710 with a fused pocket area isshown in FIG. 76. The method can begin at 1701 with providing aplurality of fusible strands. The fusible strands can be a singlematerial or multi-layer strands according to any of the embodimentsdescribed herein. The fusible strand may be formed entirely of athermoplastic polymer material or include a thermoplastic polymercoating. The thermoplastic polymer coating may be applied using anyknown technique, non-limiting examples of which include co-extrusion,dip coating, and spray coating.

In step 1702, the lacrosse pocket 1710 is formed using the fusiblestrands. The fusible strands may be knitted or woven throughout theentire pocket body 1710B or only portions of the pocket body 1710B, suchas the runners 1741, 1742. The lacrosse pocket 1710 can be formed usingan automated pocket assembly machine to form a pocket body 1710B havinga predefined, three dimensional, concave shape, including a lower pocketportion, an upper pocket portion and a middle pocket portion accordingto any of the methods described. The automated pocket assembly machinemay use multiple different strands and/or knit/weave patterns toconstruct the pocket body 1710B according to any of the embodimentsdescribed herein, such as the knitting machines 1390 and 1790 describedabove. For example, as described above with respect to the thirteenthembodiment, the automated pocket assembly machine can be configured toconstruct a pocket body having regions with different physicalproperties based on the knit pattern. Optionally, step 1702 of formingthe lacrosse pocket body 1710B may include integrally molding thelacrosse pocket 1710 into lacrosse head 20 according to the thirteenth,fourteenth, or fifteenth embodiments.

At step 1703, at least the portions of the pocket body 1710B that are tobe fused are exposed to a fusing treatment. A fusing treatment caninclude any treatment capable of melting and/or softening the fusiblestrands to a degree sufficient to allow the thermoplastic material tointermingle with adjacent material and/or cover adjacent strands basedon the desired fused pocket area. Non-limiting example of a fusingtreatment includes the application of heat and/or a chemical treatment.The fusing treatment may be applied for a predetermined period of timebased on the treatment, the materials to be fused, and/or the desireddegree of fusing.

The fusing treatment can be applied to either the entire pocket body1710B or directed or limited to those areas of the pocket body 1710B tobe fused. Optionally, the fusing treatment is directed or limited tothose areas of the pocket body 1710B including fusible strands. Thefusing treatment at step 1703 is configured to fuse a plurality offusible strands in one or more regions of the pocket body 1710B to format least one fused pocket area while the remaining regions of the pocketbody 1710B remain unfused. The unfused pocket area may remain unfusedbecause the strands in this region do not include a fusible material,the fusing treatment was not applied to this region, and/or the regionwas masked or protected from the fusing treatment. The fusing treatmentmay be applied to a pocket body 1710B having generally uniform physicalproperties to provide the pocket body 1710B with one or more fusedpocket areas having different physical properties from the adjacentunfused pocket areas. For example, the fused pocket area can be lesselastic, more rip resistant, more durable, more abrasion resistantand/or less flexible from the remaining portions of the pocket formingthe unfused pocket areas.

In another example, the fusing treatment may be applied to form fusedpocket areas corresponding to one or more defined regions of the pocketbody 1710B. As described above with respect to the thirteenthembodiment, the strands and knitting process used to form the pocketbody may be configured to provide regions defined by mechanical and/orphysical properties that are different from the adjacent portion of thepocket body, examples of which include the runners, the middle pocket,and/or the perimeter flange of the pocket body. The fusing treatment maybe applied to fuse the fusible strands in one or more of the definedpocket regions, such as the runners 1741, 1742, the middle pocket MP4,and/or the perimeter flange 1710PF, to form fused pocket areas in theregions, or any other individual component described herein, for examplea bullseye opening, a joint element, a vertical element, etc. Theadjacent regions of the pocket body 1710B may remain unfused.

The fusing treatment may be heat or chemical treatment based. Heat canbe applied to the pocket body 1710B through convection and/or radiation.In one example, one or more heating elements can be brought intoposition adjacent the areas to be fused in order to melt/soften thethermoplastic material of the fusible strands. In another example,heated air can be directed toward the areas to be fused. Optionally, theareas to be fused can be heated using a heat lamp or laser heater toheat the desired areas sufficiently to cause melting/softening of thethermoplastic material of the fusible strands. The time and temperatureof the heat treatment may be based on the materials to be fused and/orthe desired degree of fusing.

A chemical treatment can be applied to either to the entire pocket body1710B or optionally directed or limited to those areas of the pocketbody 1710B to be fused. The chemical treatment can be applied bydipping, spraying, or painting the chemical treatment onto the desiredareas of the pocket body 1710B. In one example, the chemical treatmentis in the form of a solvent capable of softening the thermoplasticmaterial and producing a solvent weld or solvent fusion between thesoftened material of adjacent fusible strands. The application, type,and amount of solvent, as well as the duration of time that the strandsare exposed to the chemical treatment may be based on the materials tobe fused and/or the desired degree of fusing.

When the pocket body 1710B is being integrally molded with the lacrossehead 20, the fusing treatment can optionally occur while the pocket body1710B is supported on a mold portion. For example, when the lacrossepocket 1710 is integrally molded with the lacrosse head 20 using themold 1380 of FIGS. 45A, 45B, and 45C, mold portion 1380C, the fusingtreatment may be applied to the desired portions of the pocket body1710B. As described above with respect to the thirteenth embodiment, thecentral mold portion 1380C can be in the shape of a convex, upwardlyextending bulge having a three-dimensional shape that mimics the desiredor intended roundness, three-dimensional contour, and/or apex of thefinished pocket. The bulging mold surface also can be shaped threedimensionally to mimic the longitudinal and lateral curvatures andangles of the shooting ramp SR. Further, the bulging mold surface canmimic the convex and/or planar shapes of respective shooting flanksadjacent the shooting ramp and/or ball channel of the pocket. Fusing thestrands while the pocket body 1710B is on the central mold portion 1380Ccan facilitate forming the fused pocket area in the desiredthree-dimensional shape. Fusing certain pocket areas, such as therunners 1741, 1742, the shooting ramp SR, and/or the middle pocket MP4may facilitate maintaining the three-dimensional shape of these pocketareas over time and optionally increase the reproducibility of eachlacrosse pocket 1710 produced in this manner.

Heat can be selectively or fully applied to the pocket body 1710B whileit remains on the central mold portion 1380C according to any of themethods described above using convection and/or radiative heating.Optionally, the central mold portion 1380C can include in-mold heatersconfigured to heat the desired areas of the pocket body 1710B. When thefusing treatment includes the application of a chemical treatment, thechemical treatment may be sprayed or painted onto the desired areaswhile the pocket body 1710B remains on the central mold portion 1380C.

Optionally, during the fusing treatment at 1703, portions of thelacrosse pocket body 1710B which are not to be fused are protected fromthe fusing treatment. In one example, a mask or protective cover isapplied over the areas of pocket body 1710B which are not to be fused.When the fusing treatment at 1703 includes the application of heat, theareas of pocket body 1710B which are not to be fused may be protected byactive cooling, such as the application of a cooling liquid or gas, orby the areas not to be fused with an insulating plate or member.Optionally, when the fusing treatment occurs while the pocket 1710 issupported on a mold, the mold may include cooling channels configured tocool the portions of the mold that overlap with the areas of pocket body1710B which are not to be fused.

When the fusible strands include a reactive coating material thatexhibits thermoplastic properties prior to curing and thermosettingproperties after it has been exposed to curing conditions, as describedabove, the method can include an optional curing treatment at 1704. Thecuring treatment can include the application of heat, pressure,ultraviolet light, and/or treatment with a cross-linking agent. When thecuring treatment includes heat, heat can be applied to those areas thatare intended to be cured to increase the fusible strands to atemperature higher than the temperature used during the fusing treatmentat 1703. The temperature used during the curing treatment corresponds toa temperature which cures the reactive coating material, causing thecured strands to exhibit thermoset properties. Heat can be appliedaccording to any of the methods for applying heat described above withrespect to the fusing treatment 1703. Pressure can be applied using themold to apply pressure and/or vacuum pressure. Optionally, the curingtreatment can include applying a cross-linking agent to the fusiblestrands before or after the fusing treatment and prior to the curingtreatment painting, spraying, and/or dipping at least portions of thepocket body 1710B. Masks or protective covers can be used to guide theapplication of the cross-linking agent to only the desired areas.

The curing treatment can be applied to all of the fused areas of pocketbody 1710B or only a portion of the fused areas. When the curingtreatment is applied to all of the fused areas of pocket body 1710B, thepocket body 1710B that is ultimately formed will include unfused pocketareas and fused pocket areas exhibiting thermoset properties. When thecuring treatment is applied to only a portion of the fused areas ofpocket body 1710B, the pocket body 1710B that is ultimately formed caninclude unfused pocket areas, fused areas exhibiting thermoplasticproperties, and fused areas exhibiting thermoset properties. Areas thatare not to be cured can be protected from the curing treatment in amanner similar to that described above for the fusing treatment,including the use of a mask or protective cover and/or cooling of thoseareas not intended to be cured. Optionally, the cross-linking agent isonly applied to those areas intended to be cured. A mask can be used tofacilitate limiting application of the cross-linking agent to only thedesired areas. A protective cover or mask and/or directed cooling canthen be used to facilitate limiting the curing treatment to those areasof the pocket body 1710B that have been treated with the cross-linkingagent.

The method can include a cooling or evaporation step at 1705 followingthe fusing treatment 1703 and the optional curing treatment 1704. Whenstep 1703 includes a fusing treatment involving heat, the cooling atstep 1705 may include active and/or passive cooling. Passive coolingincludes removal of the heat source used in the fusing process at step1703 and allowing the lacrosse pocket 1710 to rest and optionally cometo room temperature. Active cooling includes the application of acooling medium, such as a liquid or gas at a lower temperature than thefused pocket areas, to at least the fused areas of the pocket body1710B. Optionally, a cooling body is applied to the pocket body 1710B.For example, when the pocket body 1710B is supported on a mold duringthe fusing treatment, as described above, the mold can include in-moldcooling channels to actively cool the pocket body 1710B.

Step 1705 optionally includes an evaporation process for facilitatingremoval of the solvent when the fusing treatment includes a chemicaltreatment. The facilitated evaporation process may begin after thestrands have been exposed to the chemical treatment for a predeterminedperiod of time. For example, the evaporation of a solvent used to softenthe thermoplastic material may be facilitated using heat and/or a streamof gas. Optionally, the lacrosse pocket 1710 is exposed to a vacuum tofacilitate removal of the solvent after the predetermined exposureperiod expires.

The fusing treatment step 1703 and cooling step 1705 may be performedonce to fuse all of the desired areas of the pocket body 1710B.Optionally, steps 1703 and 1705 are repeated one or more times for eachfused pocket area to be formed. For example, if the lacrosse pocket 1710includes a fused runner pocket area and a fused middle pocket area, step1703 and steps 1705 may be repeated sequentially to form each of thefused pocket areas. It is also within the scope of the invention, thateach fused pocket area is fused using a different fusing treatment.Optional curing treatment step 1704 may be performed one or more timesto provide the desired pattern of fused, unfused, cured, and uncuredareas of lacrosse pocket body 1710B.

Following solidification of the thermoplastic material of the fusiblestrands, and optional thermosetting, at step 1706 the lacrosse pocket1710 is formed having at least one fused pocket area, and optionally atleast one fused pocket area exhibiting thermoset properties. If thelacrosse pocket 1710 was not integrally molded with the lacrosse head20, the lacrosse pocket formed at step 1706 may be secured to thelacrosse head 20 according to any of the methods described herein.

Optionally, steps 1701 and 1702 of the method may be reversed with thelacrosse pocket body being formed from strands that are not fusible.Providing a plurality of fusible strands may include applying a fusiblecoating to strands in the desired areas of the already formed lacrossepocket body. The fusible coating may be applied by dipping, spraying,and/or painting at least some of the strands of the lacrosse pocketbody. In one example, following formation of the lacrosse pocket body1710B at 1702, the entire lacrosse pocket body 1710B is dipped in afusible material. In another example, the fusible material may beapplied to only those portions of the lacrosse pocket body 1710B to befused. This may include spraying or painting the fusible material ontothe strands in the desired pocket areas. Optionally, a mask may be usedto limit application of the fusible material to only the desired areas.The fused pocket areas may then be formed according to the steps 1703 to1706, as described above.

The method of FIG. 76 produces a pocket body 1710B having one or morefused areas adjacent one or more unfused areas. The interface betweenthe fused areas and the unfused areas may or may not be well defined, asit is understood that there may be some “bleeding” during the fusingtreatment step 1703. The pocket body 1710B has a three dimensional,concave contour in places and in other places may be quite linear. Theinterface between the fused areas and the unfused areas may be curved orlinear, based on the contour of the pocket body 1710B at the interface.

Referring now to FIGS. 77-78, an example of using the method of FIG. 76to form a fused pocket area is illustrated. The lacrosse pocket 1710 inFIG. 77 is shown having a fused pocket area corresponding to the area inwhich it is desired for the ball to rest, also called a bullseye areaBE. The fused bullseye area BE overlaps with the middle pocket portionMP4. Optionally, the fused bullseye area overlaps with a differentpocket portion, such as a high pocket area, as desired. Fusing thestrands forming the bullseye area BE can facilitate maintaining thethree-dimensional shape of the bullseye area BE over time. During use,the material forming a traditional pocket may stretch, causing the areain which the ball comes to rest to shift, resulting in a changing andunpredictable ball rest position. Fusing the bullseye area BE mayincrease the stability of the shape and/or location of the bullseye areaBE overtime, producing a more predictable ball rest position. Fusing thebullseye area BE may also increase reproducibility of the bullseye areain each lacrosse pocket produced.

The fused bullseye area BE may be formed according to the method of FIG.76 described above. As illustrated in FIG. 78, a mask M may be usedduring the fusing treatment to protect the portions of the pocket body1710B which are not to be fused. At step A, the pocket body 1710B issupported on the lacrosse head 20 (as shown), and optionally on a pocketmold portion, such as the central mold portion 1380C described above. Atstep B, prior to the application of the fusing treatment, the mask M isapplied to the pocket body 1710B. The mask M includes an openingcorresponding to the bullseye area BE that is to be fused. In thismanner, only the area corresponding to the bullseye area BE is exposedto the fusing treatment, which in this example includes the applicationof heat from heater 1797. Following the fusing treatment, at step C, themask M is removed revealing the unfused areas of the pocket body 1710Bsurrounding the fused bullseye area BE.

The mask M may be configured to protect the remaining areas of thepocket body 1710B that are not meant to be fused, based on the nature ofthe fusing treatment. For example, when the fusing treatment includesheat, the mask M may include a heat reflective surface configured toreflect some or all of the heat applied to the pocket body 1710B. Theheat reflective surface may be configured to reflect enough of theapplied heat to prevent or minimize fusing and/or damage of strands inthe portion of the body 1710B that is not to be fused. Optionally, themask M includes an active cooling feature, such as liquid or gas coolingchannels, which facilitates preventing or minimizing heating of thestrands underneath the mask M. When the fusing treatment includes achemical treatment, the mask M blocks application of the chemicaltreatment to the areas of the body underneath the mask M.

Referring now to FIGS. 79-80, another example of using the method ofFIG. 76 to form a fused pocket area is illustrated. As illustrated inFIG. 79, the pocket body 1710B includes a fused perimeter area FPAextending around the perimeter of the pocket body 1710B adjacent thescoop 28, sidewalls 24, 26, and the ball stop 23. Optionally, the fusedperimeter area FPA extends only around a portion of the perimeter of thepocket body 1710B, such as the portion adjacent the scoop 28, forexample. The fused perimeter area FPA may reinforce the connectionbetween the pocket body 1710B and the adjacent portions of the lacrossehead 20, which may increase the durability of the lacrosse pocket 1710.The fused perimeter area FPA may reduce the likelihood that the pocket1710 rips or tears out from the overmolded polymeric material from whichthe head 20 is constructed. The fused perimeter area, or any fusedpocket area, also can be configured to be of a reduced or lesserthickness T11 (FIG. 83), from the ball facing interior surface to anopposing exterior surface, than the thickness T12 of the remainingportions of the lacrosse pocket. This can be due to the strands in thefused area melting and flowing onto interstitial spaces between strands,thereby decreasing the volume occupied by strands in the fused pocketarea. As a result, the fused pocket area can decrease in thicknessrelative to the remaining portion, which might have no melting of itsstrands, in which case the strands retain their volume. With such fusingand compaction of the fused pocket area, that area can become lesselastic than adjacent regions, and can better serve as a partially rigidsupport surface over which a lacrosse ball can roll.

As illustrated in FIG. 80, the fused perimeter area FPA can be formedduring the molding process in which the pocket body 1710B is integrallymolded with the lacrosse head 20, such as described above with respectto the thirteenth embodiment of FIGS. 45B and 45C. As illustrated instep A of FIG. 80, the lacrosse body 1710B is placed adjacent thecentral mold portion 1380C with the perimeter flange 1710PF placedwithin the adjacent sidewall mold cavity 1380SW (shown), scoop moldcavity 1380SC, and base mold cavity 1380BA. At least the perimeterflange 1710PF includes fusible strands, optionally the entire pocketbody 1710 includes fusible strands.

At step B, molten material is supplied to the mold cavities 1380SW,1380SC, and 1380BA during the molding process to form the correspondingportions of the lacrosse head 20. The thermoplastic material of thefusible strands forming or included in the perimeter flange 1710PF maybe configured to melt and/or soften from the heat released from themolten material during the molding process. The distance the fusedperimeter area FPA extends from the lacrosse head 20 may be based on thethermoplastic material of the fusible strands and the temperature of thelacrosse body 1710B adjacent the mold cavities 1380SW, 1380SC, and1380BA during the molding process. In some cases, the fused perimeterarea FPA may barely be visible to the naked eye beyond the edge of thescoop 28, sidewalls 24, 26, and the ball stop 23. Optionally, additionalheat is applied during the molding process to facilitate forming thefused perimeter area FPA. The additional heat may be supplied by aconvective or radiative heat source or in-mold heaters provided in thecentral mold portion 1380C.

The thermoplastic material of the fusible strands of the perimeterflange 1710PF and the polymeric material from which the head 20 isconstructed may be selected from compatible materials to facilitateintermingling of the thermoplastic material and the head moldingmaterial. The use of compatible materials may strengthen the connectionbetween the embedded strands of the perimeter flange 1710PF and the headmolding material within which the strands are embedded. Optionally, theembedded strands of the perimeter flange 1710PF may act as a fiberreinforcement for the polymeric material forming the head 20.

FIGS. 81-91 illustrate several, non-limiting examples of fused pocketareas that may be utilized with a lacrosse pocket. While the examplesare illustrated in the context of a traditional mesh pocket, it will beunderstood that the example fused pocket areas may be used with any knitor woven lacrosse pocket pattern, including those patterns describedherein. In addition, any of the example fused pocket areas may becombined with one or more other fused pocket areas to provide thedesired pocket performance features. As described above, the shape,dimensions, and location of the fused pocket area may be designed toincrease the stability, inelasticity, structural rigidity and/ordurability of particular areas of the lacrosse pocket. Optionally, thefused pocket area facilitates guiding the lacrosse ball in and/or out ofthe lacrosse pocket during catching, scooping, and/or throwing of thelacrosse ball. Optionally, the fused pocket area facilitates directingand/or maintaining the lacrosse ball within a desired resting orcradling position within the lacrosse pocket.

FIG. 81 illustrates an example of a fused area FA1 corresponding to aball release area extending between the sidewalls 24, 26 adjacent to thescoop 28. The fused area FA1 may generally correspond to the area inwhich the shooting strings are generally located. The dimensions of thefused area FA1 may be less than or greater than the dimensions of thearea traditionally defined by the shooting strings. Optionally, thefused area FA1 overlaps with or is disposed between shooting strings,when present.

FIG. 82 illustrates an example of a fused area FA2 corresponding to aball pocket adjacent the stop 23. The shape and dimensions of the fusedarea FA2 may vary depending on the desired pocket performance. The fusedarea FA2 provides a ball pocket area having the desiredthree-dimensional shape which does not require the user to break-in thematerial to form a ball pocket. The fused area FA2 may also provide aball pocket that is generally less elastic than the remaining portionsof the pocket, that resists deformation and that retains its shapelonger.

FIG. 83 illustrates an example of a pair of opposing fused areas FA3defining a ball channel therebetween which guides the lacrosse ball intoand out of the lacrosse pocket 1710. Each fused area FA3 extends fromscoop 28 to the adjacent sidewall 24, 26. The shape, width, and lengthof each fused area FA3 may be selected as desired to define the ballchannel. The fused areas FA3 may facilitate guiding the ball from itsresting position in the ball pocket adjacent the stop 23 toward therelease position adjacent the scoop 28 in a motion generally alignedwith the longitudinal axis of the lacrosse head 20. Optionally, eachfused area FA3 overlaps with a runner provided in the pocket body 1710B.

FIG. 84 illustrates an example of a fused area FA4 corresponding to anarea adjacent the scoop 28. The fused area FA4 may be configured toprovide increased durability to the portion of the pocket body 1710Badjacent the scoop 28, which may increase the lifespan of the lacrossepocket 1710. The fused area FA4 may extend across the entire length ofthe scoop 28 (as shown) or only a portion of the length of the scoop 28,such as a central area of the scoop 28. The extent to which the fusedarea FA4 extends from the scoop 28 toward the stop 23 may vary asdesired.

FIGS. 85-91 illustrate example fused areas in which areas adjacent thescoop 28 are fused while the area adjacent the stop 23, generallycorresponding to the ball pocket area is unfused. The fused areapatterns may be configured to aid in releasing the ball, guiding theball in and out of the pocket, and/or increasing the stiffness and/ordurability of certain areas of the lacrosse pocket 1710.

With reference to FIG. 85, the fused area FA5 includes an areacorresponding to a ball release area extending between the sidewalls 24,26 adjacent to the scoop 28, a ball channel therebetween which guidesthe lacrosse ball into and out of the lacrosse pocket 1710, and the areaadjacent the scoop 28 to provide increased durability to the portion ofthe pocket body 1710B adjacent the scoop 28.

FIG. 86 illustrates a “T” shaped fused pocket area FA6 which includes afused area portion corresponding to a ball release area extendingbetween the sidewalls 24, 26 adjacent to the scoop 28. The fused pocketarea FA6 also includes a fused area portion extending from the scoop 28to the fused ball release area which may facilitate guiding the lacrosseball into the lacrosse pocket 1710 and/or increase the durability of thearea adjacent the scoop 28. FIG. 87 illustrates a “T” channel fusedpocket area FA7 having a portion similar to the fused pocket area FA6and including additional fused area portions extending from the ballrelease area toward the stop 23 adjacent each of the sidewalls 24, 26.The additional fused area portions may define a channel pocket thatfacilitates guiding the ball into and out of the pocket. The additionalfused area portions adjacent the sidewalls 24, 26 optionally increasethe durability of the connection between the lacrosse pocket body 1710Band the head 20.

FIG. 88 illustrates a “V” shaped fused pocket area FA8 and FIG. 90illustrates a “U” shaped fused pocket area FA10 that is similar to the“T” shaped fused pocket area FA6 of FIG. 86. The differences in theoverall shape and dimensions of the fused pocket areas FA6 of FIG. 86,FA8 of FIG. 88, and FA10 of FIG. 90 may provide the lacrosse pocket 1710with different performance characteristics suited for different playerpreferences and/or different player positions.

FIG. 89 illustrates a “V” channel fused pocket area FA9 having a portionsimilar to the fused pocket area FA8 of FIG. 88 and includes additionalfused area portions extending from the ball release area toward the stop23 adjacent each of the sidewalls 24, 26. FIG. 91 illustrates a “U”channel fused pocket area FA11 having a portion similar to the fusedpocket area FA10 of FIG. 90 and includes additional fused area portionsextending from the ball release area toward the stop 23 adjacent each ofthe sidewalls 24, 26. The differences in the overall shape anddimensions of the channel fused pocket areas FA7 of FIG. 87, FA9 of FIG.89, and FA11 of FIG. 91 may provide the lacrosse pocket 1710 withdifferent performance characteristics suited for different playerpreferences and/or different player positions.

Optionally, rather than forming the pocket body 1710B from strands whichfuse with adjacent strands during a heat treatment, the pocket body1710B can be formed from strands which exhibit different levels ofthermal shrinkage. A strand with a relatively low shrinkage can becombined with a strand having a relatively high shrinkage to form theentire pocket body 1710B or only portions of the pocket body 1710B. Atleast portions of the pocket body 1710B can then be thermally treated toheat set the relatively high shrinkage strands to increase a tightnessof the pocket areas including the heat set, relatively high shrinkagestrands. Increasing the tightness of the knit/weave in these pocketareas can increase the dimensional stability of the pocket area,decrease the stretch or give of the pocket area, and/or increase thedurability of the pocket area. The pocket body 1710B can be formed andtreated to provide one or more heat set pocket areas according to any ofthe patterns of fused pocket areas described above. The heat set pocketareas can be more tightly knitted/woven while the surrounding non-heatset pocket areas are more loosely knitted/woven. The heat set, moretightly knitted/woven pocket areas can be selected to provide thelacrosse pocket 1710 with the desired performance characteristics.

Some degree of thermal shrinkage can be useful for creating a tightlyconstructed pocket body. Tightly constructed knits/weaves can sometimesbe more dimensionally stable than loosely constructed knits/weaves. Whenthe pocket body 1710B is made from strands that have a relatively highshrinkage, the body can be heat treated to shrink the heat settingstrands and tighten the knit/weave, increasing the dimensional stabilityof the pocket body 1710B. During shrinkage, at least one dimension ofthe strand, such as a length of the strand, decreases. However, thereare some materials that offer benefits in forming the pocket body 1710B,such as materials with increased strength or lightness, which have arelatively low shrinkage and will not shrink as desired during a heattreatment, thus limiting the tightness of the body formed with thesematerials. A strand with a relatively low shrinkage can be combined witha strand having a relatively high shrinkage to form a pocket body 1710Bthat takes advantage of the properties of the relatively low shrinkagematerial while utilizing the heat setting properties of the relativelyhigh shrinkage material to tighten the pocket body as desired.

Referring again to FIGS. 71 and 72, the pocket textile material caninclude strands 1791 and 1792 that are twisted in a clockwise orcounterclockwise direction with a spinner in a manner similar to thatdescribed above for the sixteenth embodiment of FIGS. 63-68. Strands1791 and 1792 have different physical properties that can be twistedtogether to form a hybrid spun ply 1770S, in this embodiment a hybridincluding a relatively high shrinkage strand 1791 and a relatively lowshrinkage strand 1792. Optionally, the relatively high shrinkage strand1791 has a relatively low modulus while the relatively low shrinkagestrand 1792 has a relatively high modulus. A relatively high shrinkagestrand 1791 can be used to form a hybrid pocket strand 1775Z or used toadjoin adjacent strands, as illustrated in FIGS. 72-74. The relativelyhigh shrinkage strand 1791 and relatively low shrinkage strand 1792 canbe combined by forming plys and strands, as described above, or byknitting these strands.

As described above with respect to the thirteenth and seventeenthembodiments, the pocket and pocket body can include different componentsand regions that are constructed from strands of different materialshaving different properties. To create such a pocket, the knittingmachine 1790 can be set up so that the different spools 1794A, 17948 and1794C include appropriate amounts of continuous, elongated strands of afirst material and at least one different second material, such as arelatively high shrinkage material and a relatively low shrinkagematerial. In some cases, the first material 1793A can be a relativelyhigh shrinkage material while the second material 1793B and 1793C is arelatively low shrinkage material. The knitting machine 1790 can pullstrands 1793A from the first cone or spool 1794A and construct at leastone area of the pocket body 1710B with this plurality of strands. Theknitting machine 1790 can separately pull the strands 1793B and 1793C ofthe second material off the cones or spools 1794B and 1794C,respectively, and interloop/weave certain ones of those strands with thestrand 1793A. Thus, the strands in certain regions can be of onematerial, and can be interlooped/woven and connected directly withstrands of the second material in predefined locations such that theknitting/weaving can be tightened by heat treatment.

Non-limiting examples of suitable relatively high shrinkage materialincludes polypropylene (PP), which also has a relatively low modulus.Optionally, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) is combined with the PP ofthe relatively high shrinkage material strand. Non-limiting examples ofa relatively low shrinkage material includes ultra-high molecular weightpolyethylene (UHMWPE), which also has a relatively high modulus.Additional examples of low shrinkage materials include carbon fibers,aramids (e.g. sold under the tradename TECHNORA), high strength PET,thermoset liquid-crystalline polyoxazoles (e.g. sold under the tradenameZYLON), and para-aramids (e.g. sold under the tradename TWARON). Thecombination of relatively high shrinkage, low modulus materials (e.g.PP) with relatively low shrinkage, high modulus materials (e.g. UHMWPE)takes advantage of the heat setting properties of the first material andthe increased strength of the second material. A hybrid strand orinterlooping/weaving provides for greater design choice in choosing thematerials used to form the pocket body 1710B to provide the pocket body1710B with the desired combination of physical and mechanicalproperties.

The method of FIG. 76 can be used to form one or more heat set pocketareas in a manner similar to that described above for forming the fusedpocket areas. Rather than applying a fusing treatment at 1703, thepocket body 1710B can be heated to a temperature that causes therelatively high shrinkage material to shrink as desired to tighten thebody in the heat set pocket area to form a pocket area that is tighterthan areas which are not heat set. Heat may be applied according to anyof the methods described above at step 1703. Heat may be appliedselectively to the desired areas of the pocket body 1710B. Optionally, amask or protective cover can be used to inhibit heat setting in areaswhere heating or shrinkage is not desired. The heat setting treatmentmay be applied to heat the relatively high shrinkage material strands inone or more of defined pocket regions, such as the runners 1741, 1742,the middle pocket MP4, and/or the perimeter flange 1710PF, to formtightened, heat set pocket areas in the regions. The strands in adjacentregions of the pocket body 1710B can remain unchanged, and thus thesepocket areas remain untightened. The heat set areas can have a tighterknit/weave than the adjacent regions of the pocket body 1710B, which mayallow for these areas to have less stretch, increased durability, and/orincreased dimensional stability compared to non-heat set areas.Increased stretch in some of the non-heat set areas compared to the heatset areas may be desirable for some aspects of pocket performance.Following the heat treatment, the heat set strands can be cooled asdescribed at step 1705.

Directional terms, such as “vertical,” “horizontal,” “top,” “bottom,”“upper,” “lower,” “inner,” “inwardly,” “outer” and “outwardly,” are usedto assist in describing the invention based on the orientation of theembodiments shown in the illustrations. The use of directional termsshould not be interpreted to limit the invention to any specificorientations.

The above description is that of current embodiments of the invention.Various alterations and changes can be made without departing from thebroader aspects of the invention as defined in the appended claims,which are to be interpreted in accordance with the principles of patentlaw including the doctrine of equivalents. To the extent anydefinitions, interpretation or construction herein conflict withdefinitions, interpretations or construction of similar items in anyitem incorporated by reference herein, the definitions, interpretationsor construction herein shall govern. This disclosure is presented forillustrative purposes and should not be interpreted as an exhaustivedescription of all embodiments of the invention or to limit the scope ofthe claims to the specific elements illustrated or described inconnection with these embodiments. For example, and without limitation,any individual element(s) of the described invention may be replaced byalternative elements that provide substantially similar functionality orotherwise provide adequate operation. This includes, for example,presently known alternative elements, such as those that might becurrently known to one skilled in the art, and alternative elements thatmay be developed in the future, such as those that one skilled in theart might, upon development, recognize as an alternative. Further, thedisclosed embodiments include a plurality of features that are describedin concert and that might cooperatively provide a collection ofbenefits. The present invention is not limited to only those embodimentsthat include all of these features or that provide all of the statedbenefits, except to the extent otherwise expressly set forth in theissued claims. Any reference to claim elements in the singular, forexample, using the articles “a,” “an,” “the” or “said,” is not to beconstrued as limiting the element to the singular. Any reference toclaim elements as “at least one of X, Y and Z” is meant to include anyone of X, Y or Z individually, and any combination of X, Y and Z, forexample, X, Y, Z; X, Y; X, Z ; and Y, Z.

The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:
 1. A method of making alacrosse pocket comprising: mechanically manipulating a plurality offirst and a plurality of second strands with an automated pocketassembly machine during an automated process to form a lacrosse pocketbody during the automated process, the lacrosse pocket body including apredefined, three dimensional, concave shape, the lacrosse pocket bodyhaving a lower pocket portion, an upper pocket portion and a middlepocket portion therebetween; heating the plurality of first strands sothat the plurality of first strands at least partially melt to form afirst molten material that fuses individual ones of the plurality offirst strands with one another; cooling the plurality of first strandsso that the first molten material solidifies, thereby forming a fusedpocket area of the lacrosse pocket body.
 2. The method of claim 1,wherein the plurality of first strands form a perimeter of the lacrossepocket body, wherein the perimeter is the fused pocket area of thelacrosse pocket body.
 3. The method of claim 2, wherein the plurality ofsecond strands do not melt during the heating step, wherein theplurality of second strands are located inward from the perimeter,forming a remaining region of the lacrosse pocket body, wherein thefused pocket area is reinforced relative to and less elastic than theremaining region.
 4. The method of claim 1 comprising: forming the fusedpocket area along a perimeter of the lacrosse pocket body.
 5. The methodof claim 1 comprising: forming the fused pocket area so that the fusedpocket area forms a runner extending away from the middle pocket portiontoward the upper pocket portion.
 6. The method of claim 1 comprising:forming the fused pocket area so that the fused pocket area is of alesser thickness than a thickness of a remaining region of the lacrossepocket body.
 7. The method of claim 1, comprising: knitting the lacrossepocket body with the assembly machine during a knitting process.
 8. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the plurality of first strands areconstructed from a thermoplastic polymer material.
 9. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the plurality of second strands are constructed from anon-melting material, wherein the plurality of second strands do notmelt during the heating step.
 10. The method of claim 1, wherein theplurality of first strands are constructed from a first thermoplasticpolymer with a first melting temperature, and a second thermoplasticpolymer with a second melting temperature that is less than the firstmelting temperature, wherein the second thermoplastic polymer melts toform the first molten material during the heating step.
 11. The methodof claim 1, wherein the lacrosse pocket body includes an outer perimeteredge, wherein the fused pocket area is formed inward from the outerperimeter edge, wherein the fused pocket area is more rigid than aremaining portion of the lacrosse pocket body so as to interact with andsupport a lacrosse ball in the pocket.
 12. A method of manufacturing alacrosse pocket comprising: mechanically manipulating a plurality ofstrands with an automated pocket assembly machine during an automatedprocess to form a unitary textile material, the unitary textile materialincluding a first region and a second region joined with one another asintegral parts of the same unitary textile material, the first regionhaving a first set of physical properties, the second region having asecond set of physical properties different from the first set ofphysical properties, the unitary textile material forming an upperpocket portion adapted to connect to a lacrosse head scoop, a lowerpocket portion adapted to connect to a lacrosse head base, and a middlepocket portion located between the upper pocket portion and the lowerpocket portion, the middle pocket portion having a predefined, threedimensional concave contour formed during the mechanically manipulatingstep, fusing the plurality of strands to one another in the firstregion, and leaving the plurality of strands unfused to one another inthe second region.
 13. The method of claim 12, wherein during the fusingstep a portion of individual ones of the plurality of strands melts toform a molten material that at least one of encapsulates an adjacentstrand and mixes with a second molten material of an adjacent strand,wherein during the fusing step the first region becomes less elasticthan the second region.
 14. The method of claim 12, wherein the strandsare twisted with one another to form a yarn.
 15. The method of claim 12,wherein the first region is in the form of a bullseye disposed in themiddle pocket portion.
 16. The method of claim 12, wherein the firstregion is in the form of a runner extending from the middle pocketportion through the upper pocket portion, wherein due to the fusing ofstrands in the first region, the runner is less elastic than theremainder of the middle pocket portion.
 17. A method of manufacturing alacrosse pocket comprising: providing first and second strands;mechanically manipulating the first and second strands with an automatedpocket assembly machine during an automated process to form a lacrossepocket during the mechanically manipulating including a predefined,three dimensional, concave shape; and fusing at least one of the firststrands and the second strands to form a fused pocket area in thelacrosse pocket and an unfused pocket area in the lacrosse pocket,wherein the fused pocket area is less elastic than the unfused pocketarea.
 18. The method of claim 17, comprising: forming the fused areainwardly from a perimeter flange of the lacrosse pocket a preselecteddistance.
 19. The method of claim 18, wherein the fusing includesheating the first strands to a first temperature so that the firststrands at least partially melt to form a first molten material; curingat least a portion of the first molten material to form a thermosetmaterial; and cooling the first strands so that the first moltenmaterial solidifies, thereby forming the fused pocket area of thelacrosse pocket body, at least a portion of which is a cured thermoset.20. A method of making a lacrosse pocket comprising: providing first andsecond strands having first and second lengths, the first strands havinga thermal shrinkage greater than the second strands; mechanicallymanipulating the first and second strands with an automated pocketassembly machine during an automated process to form a lacrosse pocketbody during the automated process, the lacrosse pocket body including apredefined, three dimensional, concave shape, the lacrosse pocket bodyhaving a lower pocket portion, an upper pocket portion and a middlepocket portion therebetween; heating at least a first portion of thelacrosse pocket body to a first temperature to induce shrinkage of thelength of the first strands in the first portion; and cooling the firstportion, thereby forming a first, tightened pocket area in which thelength of the first strands has decreased and a second pocket area inwhich the length of the first and/or second strands remain unchanged.